’99 avalon (usa/canada)- u - amazon s3 · ’00 avalon u (l/o 9908) 2 1. side vents 2. side...

’99 AVALON (USA/CANADA)- U

i

Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of value- conscious people who drive Toyotas. Weare proud of the advanced engineering and quality construction of each vehicle webuild.

This Owner’s Manual explains the features of your new Toyota. Please read it andfollow the instructions carefully so that you can enjoy many years of safe motoring.

When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehiclebest and is interested in your complete satisfaction. He will provide quality mainte-nance and any other assistance you may require.

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The nextowner will need this information also.

All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time ofprinting. However, because of Toyota’s policy of continual product improve-ment, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment,including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipmentnot installed on your vehicle.

1999 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or inpart, without the written permission of Toyota Motor Corporation.

’00 AVALON U (L/O9908)

1

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSOverview of instruments and controlsInstrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 1

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

2

1. Side vents

2. Side defroster outlets

3. Garage door opener

4. Center vents

5. Electric moon roof switch and/or frontinterior light, and front personal lights,auxiliary box

6. Power door lock switches

7. Power window switches

8. Auxiliary boxes

9. Glove box

10. Trunk opener cancel switch

11. Coin holder

12. Rear console vents

13. Power outlet (115 VAC)

14. Power outlet (12 VDC)

15. Cup holder

16. Automatic transmission selector lever

17. Hood lock release lever

18. Parking brake pedal

19. Window lock switch

Instrument panel overview�With bucket front seat


3

1. Power rear view mirror control switch

2. Headlight and turn signal switch and front fog light switch

3. Wiper and washer switches

4. Emergency flasher switch

5. Car audio

6. Air conditioning controls

7. Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch

8. Cigarette lighter and ashtray

9. Seat heater switches

10. Ignition switch

11. Power outlet main switch

12. Vehicle skid control system off switch

13. Cruise control switch

14. Tilt steering lock release lever

15. Trunk lid opener switch

16. Instrument panel light control knob

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

4

1. Side vents

2. Side defroster outlets

3. Automatic transmission selector lever

4. Garage door opener

5. Center vents

6. Electric moon roof switch and/or frontinterior light, and front personal lights,auxiliary box

7. Power door lock switches

8. Power window switches

9. Auxiliary boxes

10. Glove box

11. Coin holder

12. Cup holder

13. Trunk opener cancel switch

14. Hood lock release lever

15. Parking brake pedal

16. Window lock switch

�With bench type front seat


5

1. Power rear view mirror control switch

2. Headlight and turn signal switch and front fog light switch

3. Wiper and washer switches

4. Emergency flasher switch

5. Car audio

6. Air conditioning controls

7. Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch

8. Seat heater switches

9. Cigarette lighter and ashtray

10. Power outlet (115 VAC)

11. Power outlet (12 VDC)

12. Ignition switch

13. Power outlet main switch

14. Vehicle skid control system off switch

15. Cruise control switch

16. Tilt steering lock release lever

17. Trunk lid opener switch

18. Instrument panel light control knob

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

6

1. Engine coolant temperature gauge

2. Tachometer

3. Service reminder indicators and indicator lights

4. Speedometer

5. Odometer and two trip meters

6. Clock

7. Outside temperature gauge

8. “ADJ” button∗

9. “MODE” button∗

10. “ODO/TRIP” button

11. Fuel gauge

∗: This button is used to adjust the clock. For details, see “Clock” in Section 1- 9.

Instrument cluster overview�Type A


7

1. Engine coolant temperature gauge

2. Tachometer

3. Service reminder indicators and indicator lights

4. Speedometer

5. Clock

6. Outside temperature gauge

7. Multi- information display

8. “LIGHT” button∗

9. “MODE” button∗

10. “RESET/ADJ” button∗

11. “DISPLAY” button∗

12. Odometer and two trip meters

13. “ODO/TRIP” button

14. Fuel gauge

∗: This button is used to operate the multi- information display. For details, see “Multi- information display—” in Section 1- 5.

�Type B

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

8

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

Brake system warning light∗1

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Discharge warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Low oil pressure warning light∗1

(type A)

(type B)

Low fuel level warning light∗1

Anti- lock brake system warning light∗1(type A)

(type B)

Open door warning light∗1

Rear light failure warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warning light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Vehicle skid control system warning light∗1

Vehicle skid control system off indicator light∗1


9

Cruise control indicator light∗2

Automatic transmission indicator lights

Slip indicator light

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” in Section 1- 5.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” in Section 1- 6.

Overdrive- off indicator light

Headlight high beam indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

10


11

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSKeys and Doors

SECTION 1- 2

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

12

Keys 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


13

Engine immobiliser system 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

14

Side doors 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


15

Power windows 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

16

Trunk lid 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


17

Hood 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

18

Theft deterrent system 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


19

Fuel tank cap 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

20

Electric moon roof 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


21

Your vehicle is supplied with two kindsof keys.

1. Master key—This key works in everylock.

2. Sub key—This key will not work in theglove box and trunk.

To protect things locked in the glove boxor trunk when you have your vehicleparked, leave the sub key with the atten-dant.

Since the doors and trunk lid can belocked without a key, you should alwayscarry a spare master key in case youaccidentally lock your keys inside the ve-hicle.

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend you to write down the keynumber and keep it in safe place.

Your vehicle is supplied with two kindsof keys.

Master key (black)—This key works in ev-ery lock. Your Toyota dealer will need itto make you a new key with built- intransponder chip.

Sub key (gray)—This key will not work inthe glove box and trunk.

A transponder chip for engine immobilisersystem has been filled in the head of themaster and sub keys. These chips areneeded to enable the system to functioncorrectly, so be careful not to lose thesekeys. If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the systemor start the engine.

Keys (without engine immobiliser system)

Keys (with engineimmobiliser system)

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

22

To protect things locked in the glove boxor trunk when you have your vehicleparked, leave the sub key with the atten-dant.

Since the doors and trunk lid can belocked without a key, you should alwayscarry a spare master key in case youaccidentally lock your keys inside the ve-hicle.

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-ponder chip, observe the followingprecautions:

� When starting the engine, do notuse the key with a key ring restingon the key grip and do not pressthe key ring against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts.

� When starting the engine, do notuse the key with other transponderkeys around (including keys of oth-er vehicles) and do not press otherkey plates against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts. Ifthis happens, remove the key onceand then insert it again after takingoff other transponder keys (includ-ing keys of other vehicles) from thering or while gripping or coveringthem with your hand to start theengine.


23

� Do not bend the key grip.

� Do not cover the key grip with anymaterial that cuts off electromagnet-ic waves.

� Do not knock the key hard againstother objects.

� Do not leave the key exposed tohigh temperatures for a long period,such as on the dashboard and hoodunder the direct sunlight.

� Do not put the key in water orwash it in an ultrasonic washer.

� Do not use the key with electromag-netic materials. KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend you to write down the keynumber and keep it in safe place.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

24

Engine immobiliser system

The engine immobiliser system is atheft prevention system. When you in-sert the key in the ignition switch, thetransponder chip in the key’s headtransmits an electronic code to the ve-hicle. The engine will start, only whenthe electronic code in the chip corre-sponds to the registered ID code forthe vehicle.

The system is automatically set when thekey is removed from the ignition switch.The indicator light will start flashing every1 second to show the system is set.

If either of the following indicator condi-tions occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.

� The indicator light stays on exceptwhen the theft deterrent system is set-ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrentsystem”.)

� The indicator light does not start flash-ing when the key is removed from theignition switch.

� The indicator light flashes unsteady.

Inserting the registered key in the ignitionswitch automatically cancels the system,which enables the engine to start. Theindicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you anew key with built- in transponder chip,your dealer will need your key numberand master key. However, there is a limitto the number of additional keys yourToyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the sys-tem or start the engine.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-semble the engine immobiliser sys-tem. If any unauthorized changes ormodifications are made, the properoperation of the system cannot beguaranteed.


25

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZ RI- 4ETYMADE IN JAPAN

FCC ID: NT8- 15607YU3FXCVRMADE IN CANADA

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS- 210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

Side doors—

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key forward.To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the doors lock and unlock simulta-neously with either front door. In the driv-er’s door lock, turning the key once willunlock the driver’s door and twice in suc-cession will unlock all the doors simulta-neously.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

26

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHINSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The driver’s door can be opened by pull-ing the inside door lever even if the lockknob is depressed.

Closing the door with the lock knob in thelock position will also lock the door. Becareful not to lock your keys in the ve-hicle.

The door cannot be locked if you leavethe key in the ignition switch.

If the vehicle is subjected to a severefrontal, rear or side impact with the igni-tion switch turned to the “ON” position, alldoors will unlock automatically after a fewseconds.

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side


27

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHPOWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch on the front side.To unlock: Push the switch on the rearside.

All the doors lock or unlock simultaneous-ly.

Auto door locking function : All doorswill lock automatically when the shift leveris moved out of “P” position and the brakepedal is released after all doors areclosed and the ignition switch is turned tothe “ON” position. This auto door lockingfunction is operable only once after theignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-tion.

All doors can still be locked manually andthis auto door locking function can be dis-abled. Consult your Toyota dealer, for de-tails.

REAR DOOR CHILD- PROTECTORS

Turn the lock knob to the “LOCK” posi-tion as shown on the label.

This feature allows you to lock a reardoor so it can be opened from the outsideonly, not from inside. We recommend us-ing this feature whenever small childrenare in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle during an accident. It also helpsprevent the doors from being openedunintentionally.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

28

—Wireless remote control

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

Your vehicle has a wireless remotecontrol system that can lock or unlockall the doors, or open the trunk lidfrom a distance within approximately 1m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THEDOORS

To lock or unlock all the doors, pushthe “LOCK” switch or “UNLOCK”switch of the transmitter slowly andsecurely.

To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All thedoors are locked simultaneously. At thistime one beep will be heard, parkinglights, side marker lights, license platelights and tail lights flash once.

Check to see that the doors are securelylocked.

If any of the doors is not securely closed,or if the key is in the ignition switch,locking cannot be performed by the“LOCK” switch and a beep will sound con-tinuously for 10 seconds.

To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switchonce to unlock the driver’s door alone.Pushing the switch twice within 3 secondsunlocks all the doors simultaneously. Eachtime the “UNLOCK” switch is pushed, twobeeps will be heard, and the parkinglights, side marker lights, license platelights and tail lights flash twice.

If the ignition key is in the “ON” position,unlocking cannot be performed by the“UNLOCK” switch.

You have 30 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock feature.If a door is not opened by then, all thedoors will be automatically locked again.

If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is keptpressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-tion is not repeated. Release the buttonand then push again.


29

OPENING THE TRUNK LID

To open the trunk lid, push the trunklid open switch of the transmitter slow-ly and surely. A long beep will sound.

If the ignition key is in the “ON” position,the trunk lid cannot be opened by thetrunk lid open switch.

To open the trunk lid with the master key,see “Trunk lid” in this section.

“PANIC” SWITCH

Pushing the “PANIC” switch for 2 sec-onds blows the horn intermittently andflashes the headlight, tail light andfront interior light.

The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-hicle theft when you witness anyone at-tempting to break into or damage yourvehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stopalarm midway, do the following:

� Push the “PANIC” switch once again.

� Unlock any doors with the key or wire-less remote control transmitter.

� Open the trunk with the key or wirelessremote control transmitter.

� Turn the key from the “LOCK” to “ON”position.

The “PANIC” mode does not work whenthe ignition key is in the “ON” position.

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLTRANSMITTER

The wireless remote control transmitter isan electronic component. Observe the fol-lowing instructions in order not to causedamage to the transmitter.

� Do not leave the transmitter on placeswhere the temperature becomes highsuch as on the dashboard.

� Do not disassemble it.

� Avoid knocking it hard against otherobjects or dropping it.

� Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-trol transmitters for the same vehicle.Contact your Toyota dealer for detailedinformation.

If the wireless remote control transmitterdoes not actuate the doors or trunk lid, oroperate from a normal distance:

� Check for closeness to a radio trans-mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the transmitter.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

30

� The battery may have been consumed.Check the battery in the transmitter. Toreplace the battery, see following “RE-PLACING TRANSMITTER BATTERY”.

REPLACING TRANSMITTER BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithiumbattery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken thatsmall children do not swallow the re-moved transmitter battery or compo-nents.

NOTICE

When replacing the transmitter bat-tery, be careful not to lose the com-ponents.

Replace the transmitter battery by the fol-lowing procedures:

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open thetransmitter case.

2. Push the edge of the discharged trans-mitter battery and lift it out as shownin the above illustration.


31

3. Put a new transmitter battery with posi-tive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

� Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the transmitter bat-tery should be faced correctly.

� Be careful not to bend the electrodeof the transmitter battery insertionand that dust or oils do not adhereto the transmitter case.

� Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing battery, check that thetransmitter operates properly. If the trans-mitter still does not operate properly, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

If you lose your transmitter, contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toavoid the possibility of theft, or an acci-dent. (See “If you lose your wireless re-mote control transmitter” in Section 4.)

This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, thereis no guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is en-couraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

32

- Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

- Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that to whichthe receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

Power windows

The windows can be operated with theswitch on each door.

The power windows work when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

Key off operation: All windows work forabout 43 seconds even after the ignitionswitch is turned off. When either frontdoor is opened then closed, you cannotoperate the power window.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

Automatic operation: Push the switchcompletely down or pull it completely up,and then release it. The window will fullyopen or close. To stop the window part-way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-site direction and then release it.


33

Jam protection function: During automat-ic closing operation or key off closing op-eration, the window stops and opens halfway if something gets caught between thewindow and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

CAUTION

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to make the jam protectionfunction work intentionally.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the window fully closed.

Windowlock switch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’WINDOWS

Use the switches on the passengers’doors. The driver’s door also hasswitches that control the passengers’windows.

The window moves as long as you holdthe switch.

To open: Push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passengers’ windowscannot be operated.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

34

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.

� Always make sure the head, handsand other parts of the body of alloccupants are kept completely in-side the vehicle before you closethe power windows. If someone’sneck, head or hands gets caught ina closing window, it could result ina serious injury. When anyonecloses the power windows, be surethat they operate the windows safe-ly.

� When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.

� Never leave small children alone inthe vehicle, especially with the igni-tion key still inserted. They coulduse the power window switches andget trapped in a window. Unat-tended children can become in-volved in serious accidents.

Trunk lid (type A)—

To open the trunk lid from the outside,insert the master key and turn it clock-wise.

See “Luggage stowage precautions” inSection 2 for precautions to observe forloading luggage.

To close the trunk lid, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the trunk lid, trypulling it up to make sure it is securelyclosed.

CAUTION

Keep the trunk lid closed while driv-ing. This not only keeps the luggagefrom being thrown out but also pre-vents exhaust gases from enteringthe vehicle.


35

—Lock release lever

To open the trunk lid from the driver’sseat, pull up on the lock release lever.

—Luggage security system

This system deactivates the lock re-lease switch so that things locked inthe trunk can be protected.

After closing the trunk lid, insert themaster key and turn it counterclockwiseto deactivate the lock release lever.

After closing the trunk lid, try pulling it upto make sure it is securely locked.

Trunk lid (type B)—

To open the trunk lid from the outside,insert the master key and turn it clock-wise.

See “Luggage stowage precautions” inSection 2 for precautions to observe forloading luggage.

To close the trunk lid, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the trunk lid, trypulling it up to make sure it is securelyclosed.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

36

CAUTION

Keep the trunk lid closed while driv-ing. This not only keeps the luggagefrom being thrown out but also pre-vents exhaust gases from enteringthe vehicle.

—Lock release switch

To open the trunk lid from the driver’sseat, push the lock release switch.

—Trunk opener cancel switch

Activate Cancel

If you do not want to activate the trunklid opener system, turn off the trunkopener cancel switch in the glove box.To turn it on, push in the trunk openercancel switch.


37

—Luggage security system

This system helps protect things lockedin the trunk by safeguarding the lockrelease switch from unwanted access.

After closing the glove box lid, insertthe master key into the glove box lockand turn it clockwise to safeguard thelock release switch.

After closing the trunk lid, try pulling it upto make sure it is securely locked.

Hood

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. Thehood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch l ever and lift thehood.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. Then lower the hood and make sureit locks into place. If necessary, pressdown gently on the front edge to lock it.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

38

Theft deterrent system

To deter the vehicle theft, the systemis designed to give an alarm if any ofthe doors, trunk or hood is forcibly un-locked or the battery terminal is discon-nected and then reconnected when thevehicle is locked.

The alarm blows the horn intermittentlyand flashes the headlight, tail lights andinterior lights. If any of the doors areunlocked and the ignition switch is not inthe ignition switch, all the doors will beautomatically locked.

SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”position and remove it.

The indicator light will start flashing every1 second when the key is removed fromthe ignition switch. (See “Engineimmobiliser system” for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of thevehicle.

3. Close and lock all the doors, trunk andhood.

The indicator light will come on when allthe doors, trunk and hood are closed andlocked.

The system will automatically be set after30 seconds. When the system is set, theindicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator lightstarts flashing, you may leave the ve-hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle whenyou set the system, because unlockingfrom the inside will activate the system.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will give the alarm under thefollowing conditions:

� If any of the doors is unlocked or ifthe trunk or hood is forcibly openedwithout the key or wireless remote con-trol transmitter

� If the battery terminal is disconnectedand then reconnected

� Hotwire the ignition.

The indicator light will come on when thesystem is activating.

If any of the door is unlocked without thekey or wireless remote control transmitterand the key is not in the ignition switch,all the doors will be automatically lockedagain.


39

After one minute, the alarm will automati-cally stop and the indicator light will startflashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resetsthe alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under thesame circumstances described in“Activating the system”.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the followingthree ways:

� Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.

� Unlock any of the doors with the keyor wireless remote control transmitter.

� Open the trunk with the key or wirelessremote control transmitter.

CANCELLING THE SYSTEM

The system will be cancelled by theabove mentioned 3 ways.

If the tail lights come on for 2 seconds,the theft deterrent system has beenalarmed. Check to see if there is anyabnormality on your vehicle.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above.The doors should be locked with thekey or wireless remote control transmit-ter. Be sure to wait until the indicatorlight starts flashing.

3. Unlock any door from the inside. Thesystem should activate the alarm.

4. Stopping the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the otherdoors, trunk and hood. When testing onthe hood, also check that the systemis activated when the battery terminalis disconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly,have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

Fuel tank cap

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull thelever up.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames when refueling.The fumes are flammable.

� When opening the cap, do not re-move the cap quickly. In hot weath-er, fuel under pressure could causeinjury by spraying out of the fillerneck if the cap is suddenly re-moved.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

40

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turnthe cap slowly counterclockwise,then pause slightly before removingit. After removing the cap, hang iton the cap hanger.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swooshwhen the cap is opened. When installing,turn the cap clockwise till you hear aclick.

If the cap is not tightened securely, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

CAUTION

� Make sure the cap is tightened se-curely to prevent fuel sp illage incase of an accident.

� Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It has a built-in check valve to reduce fuel tankvacuum.

Electric moon roof

Sliding operation

Tilting operation


41

To operate the moon roof, use theswitches beside the interior light.

The moon roof works when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position. However,if all the front doors are closed, it worksfor about 43 seconds even after the igni-tion switch is turned off. It stops workingwhen either of the front doors is opened.

Sun shade operation—

The sun shade can be opened or closedby hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push the switch on the “SLIDEOPEN” side.

The roof will open and stop partway 10mm (0.4 in.) from the fully opened posi-tion. When you push “SLIDE OPEN” sideagain, the moon roof will open fully. Tostop the roof partway, push the same sideor “TILT UP” side while the roof is mov-ing.

As driving with the moon roof opened fullywill cause wind throbs, we recommendyou to drive with the moon roof partway10 mm (0.4 in.) from the fully openedposition.

The sun shade will be opened togetherwith the roof.

To close: Push the switch on the “TILTUP” side.

The roof will fully close. To stop the roofpartway, push the switch on either the“SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP” side briefly.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push the switch on the “TILTUP” side.To lower: Push the switch on the “SLIDEOPEN” side.

You may stop the moon roof at any de-sired position. The roof will move whilethe switch is being pushed and stop whenreleased.

Jam protection function (closing opera-tion only): During closing operation, themoon roof stops and opens half way ifsomething gets caught between the moonroof and frame.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.

� While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the head, hands and otherparts of the body of all occupantsaway from the roof opening. Other-wise, you could be seriously injuredif the vehicle stops suddenly or ifthe vehicle is involved in an acci-dent.

� Always make sure nobody placeshis/her head, hands and other partsof the body in the roof opening be-fore you close the roof. If some-one’s neck, head or hands getscaught in the closing roof, it couldresult in a serious injury. Whenanyone closes the roof, first makesure it is safe to do so.

� Never leave small children alone inthe vehicle, especially with the igni-tion key still inserted. They coulduse the moon roof switches and gettrapped in the roof opening. Unat-tended children can become in-volved in serious accidents.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

42

� Never sit on top of the vehiclearound the roof opening.

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to make the jam protectionfunction work intentionally.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the moon roof is fullyclosed.


43

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

44

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSSeats, Seat belts, Steering wheel and Mirrors

SECTION 1- 3


45

Seats 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

46

Front seats 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


47

Driving position memory system 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

48

Trunk storage extension 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


49

Head restraints 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

50

Armrest 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


51

Seat heaters 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

52

Seat belts 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


53

SRS driver and front passenger airbags 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

54

SRS side airbags 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


55

Child restraint 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

56

Tilt steering wheel 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


57

Outside rear view mirrors 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

58

Anti- glare inside rear view mirror 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


59

Auto anti- glare inside rear view mirror 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

60

Sun visors 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


61

SeatsWhile the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

� Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow sitting on top of afolded- down seatback, or in theluggage compartment. Persons notproperly seated and/or properly re-strained by seat belts can be se-verely injured in the event of emer-gency braking or a collision.

� During driving, do not allow pas-sengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Severe inju-ries can occur in the event of emer-gency braking or a collision.

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.

� Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use. The sideairbag inflates with considerablespeed and force; you may be killedor seriously injured.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor surface of the front seats withthe side airbags. Such changes maydisable the system or cause theside airbags to inflate, resulting indeath or serious injury. Consultyour Toyota dealer.

� Do not use accessories for theseats which cover the parts wherethe side airbags should inflate.Such accessories may prevent theside airbags from activating correct-ly, causing death or serious injury.

—Seat adjustment precautionsAdjust the driver’s seat so that the footpedals, steering wheel and instrumentpanel controls are within easy reach ofthe driver.

CAUTION

� Adjustments should not be madewhile the vehicle is moving, as theseat may unexpectedly move andcause the driver to lose control ofthe vehicle.

� When adjusting the seat, be carefulnot to hit the seat against a pas-senger or luggage.

� After adjusting the seat position,try sliding it forward and backwardto make sure it is locked in posi-tion.

� After adjusting the seatback, exertbody pressure to make sure it islocked in position.

Front seats——Front seat precautions

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

62

� Do not put objects under the seats.The objects may interfere with theseat- lock mechanism or unexpect-edly push up the seat position ad-justing lever; the seat may suddenlymove, causing the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle.

� While adjusting the seat, do not putyour hands under the seat or nearthe moving parts. You may catchand injure your hands or fingers.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Pull the lever up. Then slide the seatto the desired position with slight bodypressure and release the lever.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of sliding underthe lap belt during a collision, avoidreclining the seatback any more thanneeded. The seat belts provide maxi-mum protection in a frontal or rearcollision when the driver and the pas-senger are sitting up straight andwell back in the seats. If you arereclined, the lap belt may slide pastyour hips and apply restraint forcesdirectly to the abdomen. Therefore, inthe event of a frontal collision, therisk of personal injury may increasewith increasing recline of the seat-back.

—Adjusting front seats(manual seat)


63

3. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTINGKNOB

Turn the knob either way.

1. SEAT POSITION AND SEAT CUSHIONANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat atthat position.

Do not place anything under the frontseats. It might interfere with the seat- lockmechanism.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGSWITCH

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat-back at that position.

—Adjusting front seats(power seat)

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

64

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of sliding underthe lap belt during a collision, avoidreclining the seatback any more thanneeded. The seat belts provide maxi-mum protection in frontal or rear col-lision when the driver and the pas-senger are sitting up straight andwell back in the seats. If you arereclined, the lap belt may slide pastyour hips and apply restraint forcesdirectly to the abdomen. Therefore, inthe event of a frontal collision, therisk of personal injury may increasewith increasing recline of the seat-back.

3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORTADJUSTING SWITCH

Push the control switch on either way.

The amount of lumber support will changeas long as the switch is pushed.

The micro computer can memorize theposition of the driver’s seat and outsiderear view mirror. Two different drivingposition profiles can be entered intocomputer’s memory.

Recording a driving position in thecomputer’s memory can only be donewhen the ignition key is in the “ON”position and the automatic transmissionselector lever is in the “P” position.

SETTING A DRIVING POSITION

1. Adjust the driver’s seat and outsiderear view mirror to the desired posi-tion.

2. While pushing the “SET” button,push button “1” or “2” until the sig-nal beeps.

The beep sound means that the positionsare recorded in the computer’s memory.

By repeating these two steps and pressingthe remaining button, the driving positionfor another driver can be recorded.

To set a new memorized position, selectthe desired position and perform step 2.The previous memory will be erased andthe new position will be set.

Driving position memory system


65

To make only slight changes to an alreadymemorized position, the easiest way is tofirst activate the memorized position, thenmake the desired changes and performstep 2 above.

ACTIVATING A MEMORIZED POSITION

When you push button “1” or “2”, thedriving position will be automaticallyadjusted to the position recorded forthat button.

CONDITIONS FOR MEMORIZEDPOSITION ACTIVATION

� Ignition key “ON” and shift lever in “P”positionAll parts of the memorized positionscan be activated. However, if the brakepedal is being depressed, the seatposition will not change.

� Key not in ignition switch and within 30seconds of opening driver’s doorThe memorized position can be acti-vated.

If any driving position memory switch ispushed while one of the memorized driv-ing position profiles is being activated, theoperation will stop.

To reactivate the system, push the desiredbutton (“1” or “2”) again.

The driving position memory control sys-tem cannot be operated while the vehicleis moving.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,the computer’s memory will be erased andthe memorized position will have to be setagain.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

66

CAUTION

� Do not start the vehicle while theadjustment are being made.

� Take care not to select the wrongbutton, or the seat could strike therear passenger or hit your bodyagainst the steering wheel. If thishappens, you can stop the move-ment by pressing another drivingposition memory switch, or de-pressing the brake pedal.

Trunk storage extension

1. Pull down the center armrest in therear seat.

2. Push down the handle of the armrestdoor and open the armrest door.

See ”Luggage stowage precautions” inSection 2 for precautions to observe forloading luggage.

CAUTION

Be sure to close the door when thetrunk storage extension is not in use.Luggage or cargo in the trunk may bethrown into the passenger compart-ment in a sudden stop or crash re-sulting in injury.


67

Head restraints

Front

Rear

For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.

Rear center head restraint—When an oc-cupant sits on the rear center seat, al-ways pull up the rear center head re-straint to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

� Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closest to thetop of your ears.

� After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

� Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

Armrest

Front (bench type front seat only)

Rear

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

68

Front—To use the armrest, pull up thestrap and pull out the armrest asshown above.

Rear—To use the armrest, pull it out asshown above.

Seat heaters

For driver

For front outside passenger

To turn on the seat heater, push theswitch.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

Pushing on the switch again will turn itoff.

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-erating the seat heater because itmay make them feel too hot or causeburns at low temperatures (erythema,varicella). Use extra caution for;

� Babies, small children, elderly per-sons, sick persons or handicappedpersons

� Persons who have delicate skin

� Persons who are exhausted

� Persons who have taken alcohol ordrugs which induce sleep (sleepingdrug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat overheating, donot use the seat heater with a blan-ket, cushion, or other insulating ob-jects which cover the seat.


69

NOTICE

� Do not put unevenly weighed ob-jects on the seat and do not sticksharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)into the seat.

� When cleaning the seats, do notuse organic substances (paint thin-ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,etc.). They may damage the heaterand seat surface.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarge, turn the switch on whenthe engine is running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and the seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

Do not allow the child to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also, do not let the child siton your lap. It does not provide sufficientrestraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

Seat belts——Seat belt precautions

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

70

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

When using the seat belts, observethe following:

� Use the belt for only one person ata time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

� Avoid reclining the seatbacks toomuch. The seat belts provide maxi-mum protection when the seatbacksare in the upright position. (Referto the seat adjustment instructions.)

� Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or side doors.

� Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

� Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-ers—they may severely weaken thebelts. (See “Cleaning the interior”in Section 5.)

� Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.

Adjust the seat as needed (front seatsonly) and sit up straight and well backin the seat. To fasten your belt, pull itout of the retractor and insert the tabinto the buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow, easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

—Front outside and rear seatbelts (3- point type)


71

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” in this section.) To free the beltagain, fully retract the belt and then pullthe belt out once more.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed. It cannotprotect an adult occupant or yourchild from injury.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Push in the lock release buttonand slide the anchor down.

After adjustment, make sure the anchor islocked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your s houlder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causeserious injuries in a collision.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

72

Take upslack

Too high

Keep as low onhips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

� High- positioned lap belts andloose- fitting belts both could causeserious injuries due to sliding un-der the lap belt during a collisionor other unintended result. Keepthe lap belt positioned as low onhips as possible.

� For your safety, do not place theshoulder belt under your arm.

To release the belt, press the buckle- re-lease button and allow the belt to re-tract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.


73

Lengthen

Sit up straight and well back in theseat. To fasten your belt, insert the tabinto the buckle.


If the belt is not long enough for you, holdthe tab at a right angle to the belt andpull on the tab.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.


� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed. It cannotprotect an adult occupant or yourchild from injury.

Too high

Adjust to a snug fit

Keep as low on hips as possible

Remove excess length of the belt andadjust the belt position.

To shorten the belt, pull the free end ofthe belt.

Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit.

CAUTION

High- positioned and loose- fitting lapbelt could cause serious injuries dueto sliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended result.Keep the lap belt positioned as lowon hips as possible.

—Front center seat belt(2- point type)

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

74

To release the belt, press the buckle- re-lease button.

The front center seat belt can bestowed when not in use.

—Seat belt extenderIf your seat belt cannot be fastened se-curely because it is not long enough, apersonalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer sothat the dealer can order the proper re-quired length for the extender. Bring theheaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-er measurement and selection of length.Additional ordering information is availableat your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following. Failure to fol-low these instructions could result inless effectiveness of the seat belt re-straint system in case of vehicle acci-dent, increasing the chance of per-sonal injury.

� Never use the seat belt extender ifyou can fasten the seat belt withoutit.

—Stowing the front centerseat belt


75

� Remember that the extender pro-vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, or foranother person or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended for.

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle- release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.


When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle- release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.

When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the seat belt extender is nottwisted.


� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

76

—Front seat belt pretensioners

The driver and front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioners are designed to beactivated in response to a severe fron-tal impact.

When the airbag sensor detects the shockof a severe frontal impact, the front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the re-tractor so that the belt snugly restrainsthe front seat occupants.

The seat belt pretensioners are activatedeven with no passenger in the front seat.

Collisions occurring at certain speeds andangles may cause the seat belt preten-sioners and SRS airbags not to operateall together.

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ACC” or“ON” position. It goes off after about6 seconds. This means the front seatbelt pretensioners are operating proper-ly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side airbag sensors, inflators, frontseat belt pretensioner assemblies, warninglight, interconnecting wiring and powersources. (For details, see “Service remind-er indicators and warning buzzers” in Sec-tion 1- 5.)

The front seat belt pretensioner systemmainly consists of the following compo-nents and their locations are shown in theillustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Front seat belt pretensioner assemblies

4. Airbag sensor assembly

The front seat belt pretensioners are con-trolled by the airbag sensor assembly. Theairbag sensor assembly consists of a saf-ing sensor and airbag sensor.


77

When the front seat belt pretensioners areactivated, an operating noise may beheard and a small amount of smoke- likegas may be released. This gas is harm-less and does not indicate that a fire isoccurring.

Once the front seat belt pretensionershave been activated, the seat belt retrac-tors remain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or openthe front seat belt pretensioner as-semblies, airbag sensor or surround-ing area or wiring. Doing any ofthese may cause sudden operation ofthe front seat belt pretensioners ordisable the system, which could re-sult in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious inju-ries.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of thefront seat belt pretensioners in somecases.

� Installation of electronic devicessuch as a mobile two- way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

� Repairs on or near the front seatbelt retractor assemblies

� Modification of the suspension sys-tem

� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole

This front seat belt pretensioner systemhas a service reminder indicator to informthe driver of operating problems. If eitherof the following conditions occurs, thisindicates a malfunction of the airbags orpretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible to service thevehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ACC” or“ON” position, or remains on.

� The light comes on or flashes whiledriving.

� If either front seat belt does not retractor can not be pulled out due to amalfunction or activation of the relevantfront seat belt pretensioner.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

78

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

� The front part of the vehicle (shadedin the illustration) was involved in anaccident that was not severe enough tocause the front seat belt pretensionersto operate.

� Either front seat belt pretensioner as-sembly or surrounding area isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) airbags are designed to providefurther protection for occupants in thefollowing seats in addition to the prima-ry safety protection provided by theseat belts.

� Vehicles with bucket front seats—TheSRS airbags are designed to protectthe driver and front passenger.

� Vehicles with bench type front seats—The SRS airbags are designed to pro-tect the driver and right- front passen-ger. They are not designed to protectoccupant in the center position.

In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS airbags work together with theseat belts to help reduce injury by inflat-ing. The SRS airbags help to reduce inju-ries mainly to the driver’s or front passen-ger’s head or chest directly hitting thesteering wheel or dashboard. The frontpassenger airbag is activated even withno passenger in the front seat.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

SRS driver and front passenger airbags


79

CAUTION

A driver or front passenger too closeto the steering wheel or dashboardduring airbag deployment can bekilled or seriously injured. Toyotastrongly recommends that:

� The driver sit as far back as pos-sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

� The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

� All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ACC” or“ON” position. It goes off after about6 seconds. This means the SRS airbagsare operating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side airbag sensors, inflators, frontseat belt pretensioner assemblies, warninglight, interconnecting wiring and powersources. (For details, see “Service remain-der indicators and warning buzzers” inSection 1- 5.)

The SRS airbag system is designed toactivate in response to a severe frontalimpact within the shaded area betweenthe arrows in the illustration.

The SRS airbags will deploy if the severi-ty of the impact is above the designedthreshold level, comparable to an approxi-mate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision in theU.S.A. and 30 km/h (18 mph) collision inCanada when impacting straight into afixed barrier that does not move or de-form.

If the severity of the impact is below theabove threshold level, the SRS airbagsmay not deploy.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

80

However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if it is involved in an underridecollision (e.g. a collision in which the noseof the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under,the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions at thelower zone of airbag sensor detection andactivation the SRS airbags and seat beltpretensioners will not operate all together.

For the safety of all occupants, alwayswear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the side

Collision fromthe rear

Vehicle rollover

The SRS airbags are not designed toinflate if the vehicle is involved in aside or rear collision, if it rolls over, orif it is involved in a low- speed frontalcollision.

Hitting a curb,edge of pavementor hard material

Falling into orjumping over adeep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS airbags may deploy if a seri-ous impact occurs to the underside ofyour vehicle. Some examples are shownin the illustration.


81

The SRS airbag system consists mainly ofthe following components, and their loca-tions are shown in the illustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. Airbag module for driver (airbag andinflator)

3. Airbag module for front passenger (air-bag and inflator)



The airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.

In a severe frontal impact, the sensorsdetect deceleration and the system trig-gers the airbag inflators. Then a chemicalreaction in the inflators quickly fills theairbags with non- toxic gas to help restrainthe forward motion of the occupants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non- toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This gas is nor-mally harmless; however, for those whohave delicate skin, it may cause a minorskin irritation. Be sure to wash off anyresidue as soon as possible to preventany potential skin irritation.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, dashboard) may be hot for severalminutes, but the airbags themselves willnot be hot. The airbags are designed toinflate only once.

A crash severe enough to inflate the air-bags may break the windshield as thevehicle buckles. In vehicles with a pas-senger airbag the windshield may also bedamaged by absorbing some of the forceof the inflating airbag.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

82

CAUTION

� The SRS airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver side andfront passenger side seat belt sys-tems. The front seat occupants canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts. properly.Wearing a seat belt during an acci-dent reduces the chances of deathor serious injury or being thrownout of the vehicle. For instructionsand precautions concerning the seatbelt system, see “Seat belts” in thissection.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” in this section. � Never put a rear- facing child re-

straint system on the front seat be-cause the force of the rapid infla-tion of the front passenger airbagcan cause death or serious injuryto the child.


83

Move seatfully back

� A forward- facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to be put onthe front seat only when it is un-avoidable. Always move the seat asfar back as possible, because theforce of the deploying airbag couldcause death or serious injury to thechild. On vehicles with side airbags,do not allow the child to leanagainst the front door or aroundthe front door even if the child isseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the side airbaginflates, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” in thissection.

� Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean over the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use. The airbagsinflate with considerable speed andforce; you may be killed or serious-ly injured. Sit up straight and wellback in the seat, and always useyour seat belt.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

84

� Do not allow a child to stand up,or to kneel on the front passengerseat. The airbag inflates with con-siderable speed and force; the childmay be killed or seriously injured.

� Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” in this section.

� Do not put objects or your pets onor in front of the dashboard orsteering wheel pad that houses theairbag system. They might restrictinflation or cause death or seriousinjury as they are projected rear-ward by the force of deploying air-bags. Likewise, the driver and frontpassenger should not hold things intheir arms or on their knees.

� Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover, front passen-ger airbag cover, front passengerairbag or airbag sensor assembly.Doing any of these may cause sud-den SRS airbag inflation or disablethe system, which could result indeath or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.


85

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS front airbag system in somecases.



� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel or dashboard near the frontpassenger airbag

This SRS airbag system has a servicereminder indicator to inform the driver ofoperating problems. If either of thefollowing conditions occurs, this indicatesa malfunction of the airbags. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ACC” or“ON” position, or the light remains on.

� The light comes on while driving.


� The SRS airbags have been inflated.

� The front part of the vehicle (shadedin the illustration) was involved in anaccident that was not severe enough tocause the SRS airbags to inflate.

� The pad section of the steering wheelor front passenger airbag cover(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

86

SRS side airbags

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for occupants inthe following seats in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

� Vehicles with bucket front seats—TheSRS side airbags are designed to pro-tect the driver and front passenger.

� Vehicles with bench type front seats—The SRS side airbags are designed toprotect the driver and right- front pas-senger. They are not designed to pro-tect occupant in the center position.

In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags work together with theseat belts to help reduce injury by inflat-ing. The SRS side airbags help to reduceinjuries mainly to the driver’s or front pas-senger’s chest. The SRS side airbag onthe passenger seat is activated even withno passenger in the front seat.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags inflate with consid-erable force. To avoid potential deathor serious injury when they inflate,the driver and front passenger must:

� Wear their seat belts properly

� Remain properly seated with theirback upright and against the seat atall times.

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ACC” or“ON” position. It goes off after about6 seconds. This means the SRS sideairbags are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side airbag sensors, inflators, frontseat belt pretensioner assemblies, warninglight, interconnecting wiring and powersources. (For details, see “Service remind-er indicators and warning buzzers” in Sec-tion 1- 5.)


87

The SRS side airbag system may notactivate if the vehicle is subjected to acollision from the side at certainangles, or a collision to the side of thevehicle body other than the passengercompartment as shown in the illustra-tion.

The SRS side airbags are designed toinflate when the passenger compartmentarea suffers a severe impact from theside.

For the safety of all occupants, alwayswear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the front

Collision from the rear

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags are not designedto inflate if the vehicle is involved in afront or rear collision, if it rolls over,or if it is involved in a low- speed sidecollision.

The SRS side airbag system consistsmainly of the following components, andtheir locations are shown in the illustra-tion.



3. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflat-or)

4. Side airbag sensors

The SRS side airbag system is controlledby the airbag sensor assembly. The airbagsensor assembly consists of a safing sen-sor and airbag sensor.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

88

In a severe side impact, the side airbagsensor triggers the side airbag inflators.Then a chemical reaction in the inflatorsquickly fills the airbags with non- toxic gasto help restrain the lateral motion of theoccupants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non- toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This gas is nor-mally harmless; however, for those whohave delicate skin, it may cause a minorskin irritation. Be sure to wash off anyresidue as soon as possible to preventminor skin irritation.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Front seats may be hot for several min-utes, but the airbags themselves will notbe hot. The airbags are designed to inflateonly once.

CAUTION

� The SRS side airbag system is de-signed only as a supplement to theprimary protection of the driverside and front passenger side seatbelt systems. To ensure maximumprotection in an accident, the driverand all passengers in the vehiclemust wear their seat belts properly.Wearing a seat belt during an acci-dent reduces the chances of deathor serious injury or being thrownout of the vehicle. For instructionsand precautions concerning the seatbelt system, see “Seat belts” in thissection.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” in this section.

� Do not allow a child to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the front door or the areaof the seat from which the side air-bag deploys even if he/she isseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the side airbaginflates, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” in thissection.


89

� Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use. The sideairbag inflates with considerablespeed and force; you may be killedor seriously injured.

� Do not apply excessive weight tothe outer side of the front seats onvehicles with side airbags.

� Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force or the side airbag maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold things in theirarms or on their knees.

� Do not use accessories for theseats which cover the parts wherethe side airbags inflate. Such acces-sories may prevent the side airbagsfrom activating correctly, causingdeath or serious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the front seatswith the side airbags. Such changesmay disable the system or causethe side airbags to inflate acciden-tally resulting in death or seriousinjury. Consult your Toyota dealer ifyou consider modifications of thiskind.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

90

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag system in somecases.



� Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment

� Repairs made on or near the con-sole or front seat

This SRS side airbag system has aservice reminder indicator to inform thedriver of operating problems. If either ofthe following conditions occurs, thisindicates a malfunction of the airbags.Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ACC” or“ON” position, or the light remains on.



� The SRS side airbags have been in-flated.

� The portion of the doors (shaded in theillustration) were involved in an acci-dent that was not severe enough tocause the SRS side airbags to inflate.

� The surface of the seats with the sideairbag (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.


91

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

Toyota strongly urges the use of childrestraint systems for children smallenough to use them.

The laws of all fifty states in the U.S.A.and Canada now require the use of achild restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” fordetails.

CAUTION

� For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops,children must be properly re-strained using a seat belt or childrestraint system depending on theage and size of the child. Holdinga child in your arms is not a sub-stitute for a child restraint system.In an accident, the child can becrushed against the windshield, orbetween you and the vehicle’s inte-rior.

� Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,and is put on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

� Never put a rear- facing child re-straint system on the front seat. Inthe event of an accident, the forceof the rapid inflation of the airbagcan cause death or serious injury ifa rear- facing child restraint systemis put on the front seat.

� Unless it is unavoidable, do not puta forward- facing child restraint sys-tem on the front seat.

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

92

� A forward- facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to be put onthe front seat only when it is un-avoidable. Always move the seat asfar back as possible, because theforce of a deploying airbag couldcause death or serious injury to thechild. Do not allow the child to leanagainst the front door or aroundthe front door even if the child isseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the side airbaginflates, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

� Make sure that you have compliedwith all installation instructions pro-vided by the child restraintmanufacturer and that the system isproperly secured.

—Child restraint systemA child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with either thelap belt or the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully con-sult the manufacturer’s instructionswhich accompany the child restraintsystem.

To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.

Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer of the system. Generaldirections are also provided under the fol-lowing instructions.

The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.

CAUTION

� Never put a rear- facing child re-straint system on the front seat. Inthe event of an accident, the forceof the rapid inflation of the airbagcan cause death or serious injury ifa rear- facing child restraint systemis put on the front seat.

� Unless it is unavoidable, do not puta forward- facing child restraint sys-tem on the front seat.

� A forward- facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to be put onthe front seat only when it is un-avoidable. Always move the seat asfar back as possible, because theforce of a deploying airbag couldcause death or serious injury to thechild. Do not allow the child to leanagainst the front door or aroundthe front door even if the child isseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the side airbaginflates, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.


93

� After installing the child restraintsystem, make sure it is secured inplace following the manufacturer’sinstructions. If it is not restrainedsecurely, it may cause death or se-rious injury to the child in theevent of a sudden stop or accident.

When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit in the trunk or somewhere other thanthe passenger compartment. This will pre-vent it from injuring passengers in theevent of a sudden stop or accident.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem.

For instructions about how to install theanchor bracket, see “—Using a top strap”.

Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat(B) Convertible seat(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

—Types of child restraint system

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

94

(C) Booster seat(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat is used in rear- facingposition only.

CAUTION

� Never put a rear- facing child re-straint system on the front seat be-cause the force of the rapid infla-tion of the passenger airbag cancause death or serious injury to thechild.

—Installation with 3- pointtype seat belt


95

� Do not put a rear- facing child re-straint system on the rear seat if itinterferes with the lock mechanismof the front seats. This can causesevere injury to the child and frontpassenger in case of sudden brak-ing or a collision.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt are not twisted.


� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from injury. Contact yourToyota dealer immediately. Do notuse the seat until the seat belt isfixed.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

96

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.


97

4. To remove the infant seat, press thebuckle- release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat is used in forward-facing and rear- facing position depend-ing on the child’s age and size. Wheninstalling, follow the manufacturer’sinstruction about the applicable child’sage and size as well as directions forinstalling a child restraint system.

CAUTION


’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

98

Move seatfully back

� A forward- facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to be put onthe front seat only when it is un-avoidable. Always move the seat asfar back as possible, because theforce of the deploying airbag couldcause death or serious injury to thechild. Do not allow the child to leanagainst the front door or aroundthe front door even if the child isseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the side airbaginflates, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

� Do not put a rear- facing child re-straint system on the rear seat if itinterferes with the lock mechanismof the front seats. This can causesevere injury to the child and frontpassenger in case of sudden brak-ing or a collision.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.


99

CAUTION




2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

100

CAUTION


4. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle- release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat is used in forward- fac-ing position only.


101

Move seatfully back

CAUTION

A forward- facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to be put onthe front seat only when it is un-avoidable. Always move the seat asfar back as possible, because theforce of the deploying airbag couldcause death or serious injury to thechild. Do not allow the child to leanagainst the front door or around thefront door even if the child is seatedin the child restraint system. It isdangerous if the side airbag inflates,and the impact could cause death orserious injury to the child.

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Runthe lap and shoulder belt through oraround the booster seat and child fol-lowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon child’s hips. See “Seat belts” for de-tails.

CAUTION

� Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s s houlder. Fail-ure to do so could reduce theamount of protection in an accidentand cause serious injuries in a col-lision.

� Both high- positioned lap belts andloose- fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding underthe lap belt during a collision orother unintended result. Keep thelap belt position as low on hips aspossible.

� For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.



’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

102


2. To remove the child restraint system,press the buckle- release button and al-low the belt to retract.

CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat is used in forward-facing and rear- facing position depend-ing on the child’s age and size. Wheninstalling, follow the manufacturer’sinstruction about the applicable child’sage and size as well as directions forinstalling a child restraint system.

—Installation with 2- pointtype seat belt


103

CAUTION


Same angle

Same height

Move seat fully back

Move seat fully back

� A forward- facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to be put onthe front seat only when it is un-avoidable. Always move the seat asfar back as possible, because theforce of the deploying airbag couldcause death or serious injury to thechild.

When installing a child restraint system inthe front seat center position, move thedriver and passenger seats as far back aspossible, set both seatbacks to the sameangle as the back of the child restraintsystem, and set both seat cushions at thesame height so that the child restraintsystem is securely restrained.

With the child restraint system installed,check that your driving position is satis-factory and that the child restraint systemdoes not interfere with your driving.

If your driving position is not satisfactory,or the child restraint system interfereswith your driving, install it at another posi-tion.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

104

CAUTION

� When using a forward- facing childrestraint system, move the driverand passenger seats as far back aspossible, set both seatbacks to thesame angle as the back of the childrestraint system, set both seatcushions at the same height andmake sure your driving position issatisfactory.

� Ignoring the above instructions mayresult in a serious injury in case ofon accident. 1. Run the center lap belt through or

around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt is not twisted.




105

2. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, tighten the lap belt by pullingits free end to hold the convertible seatsecurely.

CAUTION


3. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle- release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

106

—Using a top strap

Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

Symbol mark

Anchor brackets

Use the anchor bracket on the back panelto attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for eachrear seat.

This symbol indicates the location of userready tether anchorage.

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.


107

2. Remove the anchor bracket coverwith the symbol mark shown in theillustration.

3. Fix the child restraint system withthe seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see ”Child restraint” in thissection.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the child re-straint system is secure by pushingand pulling it in different directions.

4. Replace the head restraint.

Store any removed covers in a safe placesuch as the glove box.

Be sure to replace all covers when theanchor bracket is not in use.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

108

Tilt steering wheel

To change the steering wheel angle,hold the steering wheel, pull the lockrelease lever toward you, tilt the steer-ing wheel to the desired angle and re-lease the lever.

When the steering wheel is in a low posi-tion, it will spring up as you release thelock release lever.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving.

� After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down to makesure it is locked in position.

Outside rear view mirrors—

Adjust the mirror so that you can seethe side of your vehicle in the mirror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s side.It is a convex mirror with a curved sur-face. Any object seen in a convex mirrorwill look smaller and farther away thanwhen seen in a flat mirror.

On some models, when you push the rearwindow defogger switch, the heater panelsin the outside rear view mirrors will quick-ly clear the surface.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. It may cause thedriver to mishandle the vehicle andan accident may occur resulting inpersonal injuries.

� Since the mirror surfaces can gethot, keep your hands off them whenthe defogger switch is on.


109

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror tobe adjustedPlace the switch at “L” (left) or “R”(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirrorPush the switch in the desired direc-tion.

Mirror can be adjusted when key is in the“ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de- icer to freethe mirror.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving, operate the lever on the loweredge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greaterclarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you alsolose some rear view clarity.

—Power rear view mirrorcontrol

Anti- glare inside rear viewmirror

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

110

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. It may cause thedriver to mishandle the vehicle andan accident may occur resulting inpersonal injuries.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

This mirror is designed to reduce glarefrom the headlights of the vehicle be-hind you during night driving.

When the ignition key is inserted andturned on, the inside rear view mirror al-ways turns on in the “AUTO” mode.

The “AUTO” indicator illuminates to showyou that the function is on.

In “AUTO” mode, if the mirror detects lightfrom the headlights of the vehicle behindyou, the mirror surface darkens slightly toreduce the reflected light.

To turn off the automatic function, pressthe switch on the “OFF” side.

To turn on the automatic function again,press the switch on the “AUTO” side.

Adjust it before driving so that the rearview is optimized.

When the outside air temperature is low,it may take little longer for the mirror todarken in response to the detection ofheadlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. It may cause thedriver to mishandle the vehicle andan accident may occur resulting inpersonal injuries.

Auto anti- glare inside rear view mirror


111

Sun visors—

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the front—Swingdown the main sun visor

To block out glare from the side—Swingdown the main sun visor, remove it fromthe hook and swing it to the side.

If glare comes from obliquely behind you,extend the plate at the end of the visor(to position 3).

To block the glare from the front when themain sun visor is swung to the side,swing down the second sun visor

CAUTION

Slide the plate only when the mainsun visor is swung down to the side.Otherwise, it can cover the anti- glareinside rear view mirror and obstructthe rear view.

—Vanity mirrors

To use the vanity mirrors, swing downthe sun visor and open the cover.

The vanity lights come on when you openthe cover.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

112

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSLights, Wipers and Defogger

Headlights and turn signals 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emergency flashers 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel light control 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front fog lights 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior light 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front personal lights 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear personal lights 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ignition switch light 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield wipers and washer 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Shifting the windshield wiper position 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers 122. . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 4


113

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or allof the lights in position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend-ing on the darkness of the surroundings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2to turn on the headlights if they are need-ed immediately when entering a dark tun-nel, parking structure, etc.

The automatic light control sensor is onthe top of the driver’s side instrumentpanel.

Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.

If you feel that the automatic light controlcomes into operation too early or too late,have the sensor adjusted by your Toyotadealer.

The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when all doors and trunk lid areclosed with the ignition key in the “ACC”or “LOCK” position and the lever at posi-tion 2, or after 20 minutes or more whenthe door or trunk lid is kept open. Thelights also automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the lever atposition 1. If the doors are locked by thewireless remote control transmitter, thelights automatically turn off immediately.To turn them on again, turn the key to the“ON” position or actuate the headlightswitch. If you are going to park for overone week, make sure the headlight switchis off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Headlights and turn signals(with automatic light controlsystem)

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

114

Daytime running light system (all mod-els in Canada and some models in theU.S.A.)

The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-ty when the parking brake is released withthe engine started, even with the lightswitch in the “OFF” position. They will notgo off until the ignition switch is turnedoff.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob tothe position 1.

Twist the knob to the position 2 to turnto full intensity for driving at night. High- Low beams— For high beams, turn

the headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.


The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out.


115

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

The lights automatically turn off after 30seconds when all doors and trunk lid areclosed with the ignition key in the “ACC”or “LOCK” position and the lever at posi-tion 2, or after 20 minutes or more whenthe door or trunk lid is kept open. Thelights also automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the lever atposition 1. If the doors are locked by thewireless remote control transmitter, thelights automatically turn off immediately.To turn them on again, turn the key to the“ON” position or actuate the headlightswitch. If you are going to park for overone week, make sure the headlight switchis off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Daytime running light system (all mod-els in Canada and some models in theU.S.A.)

The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-ty when the parking brake is released withthe engine started, even with the lightswitch in the “OFF” position. They will notgo off until the ignition switch is turnedoff.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob tothe position 1.

Twist the knob to the position 2 to turnto full intensity for driving at night.

Headlights and turn signals(without automatic lightcontrol system)

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

116

High- Low beams— For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.


The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out.

Emergency flashers

To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-sible.

The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.


117

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the switch onlonger than necessary when the en-gine is not running.

Instrument panel light control

To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the knob.

Front fog lights

To turn on the front fog lights, twistthe band of the headlight and turn sig-nal switch lever. They will come ononly when the headlights are on lowbeam.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

118

Interior light

Type A

Type B

Type C

Type A and B—The interior light turnson when any of the door is opened.The light goes off when all of the doorsare closed.

To prevent the battery being discharged,the light will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened for 20 minutes or more.

You cannot turn off the light when any ofthe doors is opened.

Type C—To turn on the interior light,slide the switch.

The interior light switch has the followingpositions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any ofthe door is opened. The light remains onfor some time after all of the doors areclosed.

To prevent the battery being discharged,the lights will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened with the switch at “DOOR” positionfor 20 minutes or more.


119

Front personal lights

With moon roof

Without moon roof

To turn on the front personal lights,push the switch. To turn the lights off,push the switch once again.

Rear personal lights

To turn on the rear personal light, pushthe switch. To turn the light off, pushthe switch once again.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

120

Ignition switch light

For easy access to the ignition switch,the ignition switch light comes on whenany of the doors are opened.

The light remains on for some time afterall the doors are closed.

To prevent the battery being discharged,the light will automatically turn off whenthe key is removed and the door is leftopened for 20 minutes or more.

Windshield wipers and washer

To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

The “INT TIME” band lets you adjust thewiping time interval when the wiper leveris in the intermittent position (position 1).Twist the band upward to increase thetime between sweeps, and downward todecrease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they willoperate a couple of times after the washersquirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” in Section 7- 3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch theglass.


121

The wiper blades retract under the hoodwhen the wipers are turned off. If retrac-tion is obstructed by snow, etc., at thebottom of the windshield, the wipersshould be shifted from the retracted posi-tion (position 2) to the rest position (posi-tion 1) above the hood level. When thesnow season is over, manually return thewipers to the retracted position followingthe procedure given below.

To pull up the windshield wipers to therest position, hold the connection ofthe wiper arm and wiper blade and pullit upward along the windshield glass.

NOTICE

To prevent the wiper blades from be-ing deformed, be sure to hold theconnection of the wiper arm and wip-er blade securely.

To replace the windshield wipers to theretracted position, push the connectionof the wiper arm and wiper blade down-ward.

NOTICE

To prevent the wiper blades from be-ing deformed, be sure to hold theconnection of the wiper arm and wip-er blade securely.

Shifting the windshield wiperposition

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

122

Type A

Type B

Type C

To defog or defrost the rear window,push the switch.


The thin heater wires on the inside of therear window will quickly clear the surface.An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethe defogger is operating.

Type C—The heater panels in the outsiderear view mirrors will also quickly clearthe surfaces. Keep your hands off themirror faces when the switch is on.

Push the switch once again to turn thedefoggers off.

The system will automatically shut off af-ter the defogger has operated about 15minutes.

CAUTION

Since the mirror surfaces can get hot,keep your hands off them when thedefogger switch is on.

Make sure you turn the defoggers offwhen the surfaces are clear. Leaving thedefoggers on for a long time could causethe battery to discharge, especially duringstop- and- go driving. The defoggers arenot designed for drying rain water or formelting snow.

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-ly coated with ice, use a spray de- icerbefore operating the switch.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires.

Rear window and outside rearview mirror defoggers


123

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

124

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators

SECTION 1- 5


125

Fuel gauge 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

126

Engine coolant temperature gauge 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


127

Tachometer 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

128

Odometer and two trip meters 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


129

Multi- information display 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

130

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . .


131

Fuel gauge

The gauge works when the ignitionswitch is on and indicates the approxi-mate quantity of fuel remaining in thetank.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the lowfuel level warning light comes on, fill thefuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gaugeneedle may fluctuate or the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fillthe fuel tank immediately.

The indicator light goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator light doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature when the ignition switch ison. The engine operating temperaturewill vary with changes in weather andengine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,your engine is too hot. If your vehicleoverheats, stop your vehicle and allow theengine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

� Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

� Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

Engine coolant temperaturegauge

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

132

� Idling for a long period with the airconditioning on in stop- and- go traffic.

� Towing a trailer.

NOTICE

� Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

� Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” in Section 4.

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates engine speedin thousands of rpm (revolutions perminute). Use it while driving to selectcorrect shift points and to prevent en-gine lugging and overrevving.

Driving with the engine running too fastcauses excessive engine wear and poorfuel economy. Remember, in most casesthe slower the engine speed, the greaterthe fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle getinto the red zone. This may causesevere engine damage.

Odometer and two trip meters

Type A

Type B


133

This meter displays the odometer andtwo trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two differentdistances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.

3. ”ODO/TRIP” button—Resets the twotrip meters to zero, and also changethe meter display.

To change the meter display, quicklypush and release the button. The meterdisplay changes in the order from theodometer to trip meter A to trip meterB, then back to the odometer eachtime you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the button until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

134

Multi- information display—1. Outside temperature gauge

2. Clock

3. Compass

4. Calendar

5. Cruise information display

6. “LIGHT” button

7. “MODE” button

8. “RESET/ADJ” button

9. “DISPLAY” button


135

Operate the multi- information displaywith the ignition switch on.

When the ignition switch is turned to“ON”, the last previously used mode dis-played just before the ignition switch isturned off will appear.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the multi- informationdisplay, the display will automatically beset to the initial mode.

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the displaywill be reduced.

“LIGHT” button

This button is used to select the illumi-nation pattern of the display.

Every time you push the “LIGHT” button,the display illuminates in the following or-der.

1. All the parts of the display are illumi-nated.

2. Clock, outside temperature gauge andcompass are illuminated.

3. Illumination is off.

—Before using the multi- information display

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

136

“MODE” and “RESET/ADJ” buttons

These buttons are used to select theitem to be reset or adjusted.

Every time you push the “MODE” button,the display toggles in the following order.

1. Hour

2. Minute

3. Year

4. Month

5. Day

6. English or metric unit selection of theoutside temperature gauge and cruiseinformation display

7. Compass deviation calibration (zone)

8. Compass circling calibration

When the item desired to be correctedappears, reset or adjust it by pushing the“RESET/ADJ” button.

“DISPLAY” button

This button is used to toggle the func-tions of the cruise information display.

Every time you push the “DISPLAY” but-ton, the display toggles.

For more details, see “—Cruiseinformation display”.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

—Clock

The digital clock indicates the time.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected, the time display will auto-matically be set to 1:00 a.m.

To reset the hour: Push the “MODE” but-ton until the hour display appears andblinks. Then push the “RESET/ADJ” but-ton.To reset the minutes: Push the “MODE”button until the minute display appearsand blinks. Then push the “RESET/ADJ”button.

After resetting the clock, push the “MODE”button until the display returns to normalcalendar mode.


137

—Calendar

The digital calendar indicates the date.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected, the calendar display will au-tomatically be set to “FRI JAN 1”.

To reset the year: Push the “MODE” but-ton until the year display appears andblinks. Then push the “RESET/ADJ” but-ton. (After the year 2018 appears, thenumber returns to 1999.)To reset the month: Push the “MODE”button until the month display appears andblinks. Then push the “RESET/ADJ” but-ton.To reset the day: Push the “MODE” buttonuntil the day display appears and blinks.Then push the “RESET/ADJ” button.

After resetting the calendar, push the“MODE” button until the display returns tonormal calendar mode.

—Outside temperature gauge

The outside temperature gauge indi-cates outside air temperatures.

To set the unit, push the “MODE” buttonuntil the unit display appears and blinks.Then push the “RESET/ADJ” button to se-lect “�C” or “�F”. (At this time, cruiseinformation and air conditioning displaysalso change.)

After setting the unit, push the “MODE”button until the display returns to normalcalendar mode.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

138

—Cruise information displayThe cruise information display indicatesthe following information.

1. Instantaneous fuel consumption

2. Average fuel consumption

3. Average vehicle speed

4. Driving range

5. Driving time

Every time you push the “DISPLAY” but-ton, the display toggles through this infor-mation.

The displayed values in the cruise infor-mation display indicate general drivingconditions. Accuracy varies with drivinghabits and road conditions.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected, the display will automaticallybe set to instantaneous fuel consumption.

To set the unit, push the “MODE” buttonuntil the unit display appears and blinks.Then push the “RESET/ADJ” button to se-lect km/liter or mile/gallon. (At this time,the outside temperature and air condition-ing displays also change.)

After setting the unit, push the “MODE”button until the display returns to normalcalendar mode.

1. Instantaneous fuel consumption(“INST ECON”)

The instantaneous fuel consumption iscalculated and displayed based on dis-tance and fuel consumption for 2 sec-onds with the engine running.

The displayed value is updated every 2seconds.

Note that an accurate figure may not beshown in the following cases.

� When the vehicle is stopped with theengine running, the display will indicatethe extremely high fuel consumption.

� When the vehicle is driving down along slope, applying the engine brake,the display will indicate the extremelylow fuel consumption.

The calculation is reset when the ignitionswitch is turned off.


139

2. Average fuel consumption(“AVG ECON”)

Average fuel consumption is calculatedand displayed based on total drivingdistance and total fuel consumptionwith the engine running.


To reset the calculations, push the“RESET/ADJ” button.


3. Average vehicle speed(“AVG SPEED”)

Average vehicle speed is calculated anddisplayed based on total driving dis-tance and total driving time with theengine running.




4. Driving range(“FUEL RANGE”)

The distance the vehicle can travel withthe remaining fuel is calculated anddisplayed based on the quantity of re-maining fuel and past fuel consumption.

The displayed value is updated every timewhen the fuel equivalent for 1 km or 1mile is consumed.

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the cal-culation is reset.

The actual driving range varies with driv-ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con-sumption is good, the driving range will belonger. If fuel consumption is poor, thedriving range will be shorter.

5. Driving time(“TRIP TIME”)

The elapsed time after the engine startsis displayed.

When the engine is started, driving timeis counted from 0:00. Up to 99:59 (99hours, 59 minutes) can be displayed.When the driving time exceeds 99:59, thecounter returns to 0:00.



—Compass

The compass indicates the directionthat the vehicle is heading. In theabove case, it shows that the vehicle isheading south.

Displays Directions

NNEE

SES

SWW

NW

NorthNortheast

EastSoutheast

SouthSouthwest

WestNorthwest

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

140

The compass may not show the correctdirection in the following conditions:

� The vehicle is stopped immediately af-ter turning.

The compass does not adjust while thevehicle is stopped.

� The ignition switch is turned off imme-diately after turning.

� The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

� The vehicle is in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� The vehicle is magnetized. (There is amagnet or a metal object on or nearthe roof.)

� The battery has been disconnected.

The compass works to calibrate the direc-tion automatically while the vehicle is inmotion, if deviation is small.

For additional precision or for completecalibrating, see “CALIBRATING THECOMPASS” below.

Compass sensor

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal objecton or near the roof of the vehicle.Doing this may cause malfunction ofthe compass sensor.

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviationcalibration)

The direction display on the compassdeviates from the true direction deter-mined by the earth’s magnetic field. Theangle of deviation varies according to thegeographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust for this deviation, stop the ve-hicle and push the “MODE” button severaltimes until “ZONE XX” appears on thecalendar display. Then push the “RESET/ADJ” button, referring to the following mapto select the number of the zone wherethe vehicle is.


141

Zone number

After calibration, push the “MODE” buttonseveral times until the calendar displayreturns to the normal mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Hawaii, Samoa: 7Guam, Saipan: 9

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

142

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circlingcalibration)

Sometimes the direction display on thecompass may not change after a turn. Torectify this, stop the vehicle and push the“MODE” button several times until“COMPASS” appears and blinks on thedisplay. Then push the “RESET/ADJ” but-ton. “CALIBRATE” appears and blinks to-gether with the compass display.

Drive the vehicle in a circle until the blink-ing stops. If there is not enough space todrive in a circle, drive around the blockuntil the blinking stops.

When the compass and the calendar dis-play return to normal mode, calibration iscomplete.

If you want to cancel the calibration be-fore it is complete, push the “MODE” but-ton again.

Perform circling calibration just afteryou have purchased your Toyota. Andthen always perform circling calibrationafter the battery has been removed, re-placed or disconnected.

� Do not perform circling calibration ofthe compass in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� During calibration, do not operate elec-tric systems (moon roof, power win-dows, etc.) as they may interfere withthe calibration.

CAUTION

� When doing the circling calibration,be sure to secure a wide space,and pay attention to people and ve-hicles in the neighborhood. Do notviolate any local traffic rules whileperforming circling calibration.

� Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.


143

(a) If parking brakeis off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b) Fasten driver’s seat belt.

If the indicator orbuzzer comes on...

(d) Stop and check.

(type A)

(type B)

(indicator and buzzer)

(e) Stop and check.

Do this.

(c) Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(h) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

(i) Close all doors.

(j) Replace bulb.

(type A)

(type B)

(g) Fill up tank.

Do this.

(f) Take vehicle toToyota dealer.

(m) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

(o) Remove key.Key reminderbuzzer

(n) Add washer fluid.

Do this.

(l) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(k) Take vehicle to Toyota dealerimmediately.

Service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

144

(a) Brake System Warning Light

This light comes on in the following caseswhen the ignition key is turned on.

� When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few secondswith the ignition on even after the parkingbrake is released.

� When the brake fluid level is low...

Have your vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer in the following cases:

� The light does not come on even if theparking brake is applied with the igni-tion “ON”.

� The light does not come on even if theignition key is turned on with the park-ing brake released.

If the light lit during driving goes out anddoes not come again, it is a normal op-eration.

CAUTION

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, immediately stop your vehicleat a safe place and contact your To-yota dealer.

� The light does not go out even af-ter the parking brake is releasedduring the engine running.

In this case, the brakes might befailing and your st opping distancewill be longer. Depress the brakepedal firmly and bring the vehicleto an immediate stop.

� The brake system warning light re-mains on together with the “ABS”warning light.

In this case, the vehicle may be-come harder to control or skid dur-ing hard braking or braking on slip-pery road surfaces.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

This light and buzzer remind you tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes andbuzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt isnot fastened. Unless the driver fastens thebelt, the light keep flashing and the buzz-er sounds for about 4 to 8 seconds.

(c) Front outside Passenger’s Seat BeltReminder Light

This light reminds you to buckle up thefront outside passenger’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to ”ON” or”START”, the reminder light flashes if apassenger sits in the front outside passen-ger seat and does not fasten the seatbelt. Unless the front passenger fastensthe belt, the light stays on. This light re-minds you to buckle up the front passen-ger’s seat belt.

If luggage load is placed on the frontoutside passenger seat, depending on itsweight and how it is placed on the seat,built- in sensors in the seat cushion maydetect the pressure, causing the reminderlight to come on.

(d) Discharge Warning Light

This light warns that the battery is beingdischarged.

If it comes on while you are driving, thereis a problem somewhere in the chargingsystem.

The engine ignition will continue to oper-ate, however, until the battery is dis-charged. Turn off the air conditioning,blower, radio, etc., and drive directly tothe nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.


145

NOTICE

Do not continue driving if the enginedrive belt is broken or loose.

(e) Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the engine oil pres-sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you aredriving, pull off the road to a safe placeand stop the engine immediately. Call aToyota dealer or qualified repair shop forassistance.

The light may occasionally flicker whenthe engine is idling or it may come onbriefly after a hard stop. There is nocause for concern if it then goes out whenthe engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil levelis extremely low. It is not designed toindicate low oil level, and the oil levelmust be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with thewarning light on—even for one block.It may ruin the engine.

(f) Malfunction indicator lamp

This lamp comes on in the followingcases.

a. The fuel tank is completely empty. (See“Fuel gauge” in Section 1- 5 for instruc-tions.)

b. The fuel tank cap is not tightened se-curely. (See “Fuel tank cap” in Section1- 2 for instructions.)

c. There is a problem somewhere in yourengine or automatic transmission electricalsystem.

If it comes on while you are driving incase c, have your vehicle checked/re-paired by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel levelin the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill upthe tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

(h) “ABS” Warning Light

The light comes on with the ignition keyturned to “ON”. If the anti- lock brake sys-tem and the brake assist system workproperly, the light goes out after a fewseconds. Thereafter, if either of the sys-tems malfunctions, the light comes on.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti- lock brake system, the brake assistsystem, the traction control system and/orthe vehicle skid control system do/doesnot operate, but the system still operateconventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti- lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden brake or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

If the following conditions occur, thisindicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warninglight system. Contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible to servicethe vehicle.

� The light does not come on with theignition key turned to “ON”, or remainson.


’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

146

If the light lit during driving goes out anddoes not come on again, it is a normaloperation.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, the vehicle may becomeharder to control or skid during hardbraking or braking on slippery roadsurfaces.

(i) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the doorsare completely closed.

(j) Rear Light Failure Warning Light

If this light comes on when the headlightswitch is turned on (at the position 1 orposition 2), it indicates that one or moreof the tail lights are burned out.

If it comes on when the brake pedal isdepressed, one or more stop lights areburned out.

Have defective bulbs replaced as soon aspossible.

(k) SRS Warning Light

This light will come on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ACC” or“ON” position. After about 6 seconds,the light will go off. This means thesystem of the airbags and front seatbelt pretensioners are operating proper-ly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side airbag sensors, inflators, front,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, warninglight, interconnecting wiring and powersources.

If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warning lightsystem. Contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible to service the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ACC” or“ON” position or remains on.


(l) “VSC” Warning Light

The light warns that when there is a prob-lem somewhere in the vehicle skid controlsystem or traction control system.

The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON”, and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

If the “VSC” warning light comes on, thevehicle skid control system and tractioncontrol system do not work. However, asconventional braking operates when ap-plied, there is no problem to continue yourdriving.

If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warning lightsystem. Contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible to service the vehicle:

� The “VSC” warning light does not comeon after the ignition is turned to on.

� The “VSC” warning light is left on afterthe ignition is turned to on.

� The “VSC” warning light comes onwhile driving without pushing “VSCOFF” switch.


147

(m) “VSC OFF” Indicator Light

The light warns that when there is a prob-lem somewhere in the vehicle skid controlsystem or traction control system.

The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON”, and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

If the “VSC OFF” indicator light comes on,the vehicle skid control system and trac-tion control system do not work. However,as conventional braking operates when ap-plied, there is no problem to continue yourdriving.


� The “VSC OFF” indicator light does notcome on after the ignition is turned toon.

� The “VSC OFF” indicator light is left onafter the ignition is turned to on.

� The “VSC OFF” indicator light comeson while driving without pushing “VSCOFF” switch.

(n) Low Windshield Washer Fluid LevelWarning Light

The light warns that the windshield washerfluid level is too low. Add washer fluid atyour earliest opportunity. (For instructions,see “Adding washer fluid” in Section 7- 3.)

(o) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer reminds you to remove thekey when you open the driver’s door withthe ignition key in the “ACC” or “LOCK”position.

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDERINDICATORS (except the low fuel levelwarning light and low windshieldwasher fluid level warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the doors.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close the door.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. Turn the ignition key to “ACC”.The SRS warning light should come on.It goes off after about 6 seconds.

5. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but donot start the engine.All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light andSRS warning light should come on. The“ABS”, “VSC”, “VSC OFF” and slip indi-cator lights go off after a few seconds.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, either the bulb is burned out or thecircuit is in need of repair. Have itchecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

148

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSIgnition switch, Transmission and Parking brake

SECTION 1- 6


149

Ignition switch with steering lock 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

150

Automatic transmission 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


151

Traction control system 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

152

Vehicle skid control system 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


153

Parking brake 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

154

Cruise control 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


155

“START”—Starter motor on. The keywill return to the “ON” position whenreleased.

For starting tips, see Section 3.

“ON”—Engine on and all accessorieson.

This is the normal driving position.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radiooperate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position and open the driver’sdoor, a buzzer will remind you to removethe key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steeringwheel is locked. The key can be re-moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn the keyfrom “ACC” to the “LOCK” position. Theselector lever must be in the “P” positionbefore pushing the key.

Vehicles with engine immobiliser system—Once you remove the key, the engine im-mobiliser system is automatically set. (See“Engine immobiliser system” in Section1- 2.)

When starting the engine, the key mayseem stuck at the “LOCK” position. Tofree it, first be sure the key is pushed allthe way in, and then rock the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key gently.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”position if the engine is not running.The battery will discharge and theignition could be damaged.

Ignition switch with steeringlock

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

156

Your automatic transmission has a shiftlock system to minimize the possibility ofincorrect operation. This means you canonly shift out of “P” position when thebrake pedal is depressed (with the ignitionswitch in “ON” position and the lock re-lease button depressed).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on theinstrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting andkey removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)

2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Automatic transmission�Floor shift type

Overdrive switch

With the brake pedal depressed,shift while holding the lock release button in. (The ignitionswitch must be in “ON”position.)

Shift while holding the lockrelease button in.

Shift normally.

Lock release buttonTo prevent misshifting Selector lever


157

(b) Overdrive switch

You can select either a third gear (withoverdrive off) or fourth gear (with over-drive on) by pushing this switch.

To turn the overdrive off, push the switch.The “O/D OFF” indicator light should comeon. To turn the overdrive on again, pushthe switch again. The “O/D OFF” indicatorlight should go off.

Always drive your vehicle with the over-drive on for better fuel economy andquieter driving.

If the engine is turned off when the over-drive is off and restarted, the overdrivewill automatically be on.

When the cruise control is being used,even if you downshift the transmission bypushing and releasing the overdriveswitch, engine braking will not applied be-cause the cruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” in this section.

(c) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “Howto start the engine” in Section 3. Thetransmission must be in “P” or “N”.

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, theautomatic transmission system will selectthe most suitable gear for running condi-tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-ing, hard towing, etc.

Always turn the overdrive on for betterfuel economy and quieter driving. If theengine coolant temperature is low, thetransmission will not shift into the over-drive gear even with the overdrive on.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

(d) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshiftthe transmission as follows:

� Push the overdrive switch. The “O/DOFF” indicator light will come on andthe transmission will downshift to thethird gear.

� Shift into the “2” position. The trans-mission will downshift to the secondgear when the vehicle speed dropsdown to or lower than 132 km/h (82mph), and stronger engine braking willbe enabled.

� Shift into the “L” position. The trans-mission will downshift to the first gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than 59 km/h (36 mph), andmaximum engine braking will be en-abled.



’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

158

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to spin orskid.

(e) Using “2” and “L” positions

The “2” and “L” positions are used forstrong engine braking as described pre-viously.

With the selector lever in “2” or “L”, youcan start the vehicle in motion as with thelever in “D”.

With the selector lever in “2”, the vehiclewill start in the first gear and automatical-ly shift to second gear.

With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to overrev the en-gine. Watch the tachometer to keepengine rpm from going into the redzone. The approximate maximum al-lowable speed for each position isgiven below for your reference:

“2” 139 km/h (86 mph). . . . . . . . . . . “L” 76 km/h (47 mph). . . . . . . . . . . .

� Do not continue hill climbing orhard towing for a long time in the“2” or “L” position. This may causesevere automatic transmission dam-age from overheating. To preventsuch damage, “D” position shouldbe used in hill climbing or hardtowing.

(f) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

(g) Parking


2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.

(h) Good driving practice

� If the transmission repeatedly shifts upand down between third gear and over-drive when climbing a gentle slope, theoverdrive should be turned off. Be sureto turn the switch on immediately after-ward.

� When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse overdrive.


159

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the enginerunning. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

NOTICE

Do not hold the vehicle on an up-grade with the accelerator pedal. Itcan cause the transmission to over-heat. Always use the brake pedal orparking brake.

(i) Rocking your vehicle if stuck

CAUTION

If your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then you mayattempt to rock the vehicle free bymoving it forward and backward. Donot attempt this procedure if peopleor objects are anywhere near the ve-hicle. During the rocking operationthe vehicle may suddenly move for-ward or backward as it becomes un-stuck, causing injury or damage tonearby people or objects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transmission and otherparts.

� Do not depress the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

� Do not race the engine and avoidspinning the wheels.

� If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

(j) If you cannot shift the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift automatic transmissionselector lever” in Section 4.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

160

Your automatic transmission has a shiftlock system to minimize the possibility ofincorrect operation. This means you canonly shift out of “P” position when thebrake pedal is depressed (with the ignitionswitch in “ON” position and the selectorlever pulled toward you).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is displayed on the in-strument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting andkey removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)

2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

�Column shift type

Overdrive switchSelector lever

With the brake pedal depressed,shift while pilling the selector lever toward you. (The ignitionswitch must be in “ON”position.)

Shift while pulling the selector lever toward you.

Shift normally.


161

(b) Overdrive switch

You can select either a third gear (withoverdrive off) or fourth gear (with over-drive on) by pushing this switch.

To turn the overdrive off, push the switch.The “O/D OFF” indicator light should comeon. To turn the overdrive on again, pushthe switch again. The “O/D OFF” indicatorlight should go off.

Always drive your vehicle with the over-drive on for better fuel economy andquieter driving.

If the engine is turned off when the over-drive is off and restarted, the overdrivewill automatically be on.



(c) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “Howto start the engine” in Section 3. Thetransmission must be in “P” or “N”.

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, theautomatic transmission system will selectthe most suitable gear for running condi-tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-ing, hard towing, etc.

Always turn the overdrive on for betterfuel economy and quieter driving. If theengine coolant temperature is low, thetransmission will not shift into the over-drive gear even with the overdrive on.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

(d) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshiftthe transmission as follows:

� Push the overdrive switch. The “O/DOFF” indicator light will come on andthe transmission will downshift to thethird gear.

� Shift into the “2” position. The trans-mission will downshift to the secondgear when the vehicle speed dropsdown to or lower than 132 km/h (82mph), and stronger engine braking willbe enabled.

� Shift into the “L” position. The trans-mission will downshift to the first gearWhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than 59 km/h (36 mph), andmaximum engine braking will be ap-plied.



’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

162

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to spin orskid.

(e) Using “2” and “L” positions

The “2” and “L” positions are used forstrong engine braking as described pre-viously.

With the selector lever in “2” or “L”, youcan start the vehicle in motion as with thelever in “D”.

With the selector lever in “2”, the vehiclewill start in the first gear and automatical-ly shift to the second gear.

With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-mission is engaged in the first gear.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to overrev the en-gine. Watch the tachometer to keepengine rpm from going into the redzone. The approximate maximum al-lowable speed for each position isgiven below for your reference:

“2” 139 km/h (86 mph). . . . . . . . . . . “L” 76 km/h (47 mph). . . . . . . . . . . .

� Do not continue hill climbing orhard towing for a long time in the“2” or “L” position. This may causesevere automatic transmission dam-age from overheating. To preventsuch damage, “D” position shouldbe used in hill climbing or hardtowing.

(f) Backing up


2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

(g) Parking


2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.

(h) Good driving practice

� If the transmission repeatedly shifts upand down between third gear and over-drive when climbing a gentle slope, theoverdrive should be turned off. Be sureto turn the switch on immediately after-ward.

� When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse overdrive.


163

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the enginerunning. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

NOTICE

Do not hold the vehicle on an up-grade with the accelerator pedal. Itcan cause the transmission to over-heat. Always use the brake pedal orparking brake.

(i) Rocking your vehicle if stuck

CAUTION

If your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then you mayattempt to rock the vehicle free bymoving it forward and backward. Donot attempt this procedure if peopleor objects are anywhere near the ve-hicle. During the rocking operationthe vehicle may suddenly move for-ward or backward as it becomes un-stuck, causing injury or damage tonearby people or objects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transmission and otherparts.

� Do not depress the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

� Do not race the engine and avoidspinning the wheels.

� If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

(j) If you cannot shift the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift automatic transmissionselector lever” in Section 4.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

164

Traction control system

The traction control system automatical-ly helps control the spinning of thefront wheels which may occur when ac-celerating on slippery road surfaces,thus assisting driver to control the driv-ing power of the front wheels.

Leave the system on during ordinarydriving so that it can operate whenneeded. When traction control is ap-plied, the slip indicator light blinks.

While the “VSC” warning light and “VSCOFF” indicator light come on, the tractioncontrol system cannot be operated.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehicleis started. This means that the tractioncontrol system is in the selfcheck mode,and does not indicate malfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-ating, you may feel vibration or noise ofyour vehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system is func-tioning properly.

When getting the vehicle out of mud ornew snow, etc. the traction control systemwill help operate to prevent the wheelsfrom spinning.

You can turn off the traction controlsystem by pushing the “VSC OFF”switch. The “VSC OFF” indicator lightwill come on. Pushing the “VSC OFF”switch a second time turns on the trac-tion control system again and the “VSCOFF” indicator light will go off. At thistime, the vehicle skid control also turnsoff and on simultaneously.


165

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM FAILUREWARNING

These lights warn that when there is aproblem somewhere in the traction controlsystem.

The lights will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON”, and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

If the “VSC” warning light and “VSC OFF”indicator light come on, the traction con-trol system does not work. However, asconventional braking operates when ap-plied, there is no problem to continue yourdriving.


� The “VSC” warning light and/or “VSCOFF” indicator light do/does not comeon after the ignition is turned to on.

� The “VSC” warning light and “VSCOFF” indicator light are left on after theignition is turned to on.

� The “VSC” warning light and “VSCOFF” indicator light comes on whiledriving without pushing “VSC OFF”switch.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower to the front wheels can not bemaintained, even though the tractioncontrol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which willcause the vehicle to lose traction. Insituations where the road surface iscovered with ice or snow, your ve-hicle should be fitted with snow tiresor tire chains. Always drive at ap-propriate and cautious pace.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

166

Vehicle skid control system

The vehicle skid control system helpsprovide comprehensive control of thesystems such as an anti- lock brakesystem, brake assist system, tractioncontrol, engine control, etc. This sys-tem automatically controls the output ofthe brakes or engine to help preventthe vehicle from skidding when corner-ing on a slippery road surface orabrupt steering wheel operation occurs.

If the vehicles is going to skid duringdriving, the slip indicator light flashes andan alarm sounds intermittently.

The vehicle skid control system activateswhen the vehicle speed is about morethan 15 km/h (9 mph).

While the “VSC” warning light and “VSCOFF” indicator light come on, the vehicleskid control system cannot be operated.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehicleis started. This means that the vehicleskid control is in the selfcheck mode anddoes not indicate a malfunction.

You can turn off the vehicle skid con-trol system by pushing the “VSC OFF”switch. The “VSC OFF” indicator lightwill come on. Pushing the “VSC OFF”switch a second time turns the systemagain and the “VSC OFF” indicator lightwill go off. At this time, the tractioncontrol also turns off and on simulta-neously.

When you turn the ignition switch on, thissystem always turns on.


167

CAUTION

� Do not rely excessively on the ve-hicle skid control system. Even ifthe vehicle skid control system isoperating, it is not that your vehicleis absolutely safe. Reckless drivingwill result in an unexpected acci-dent. Always keep safety driving inmind. If the slip indicator light fla-shes and/or an alarm sounds, spe-cial care should be taken whiledriving.

� Only use tires of specified size. Thesize, manufacturer, brand and treadpattern for all 4 tires should be thesame. If you use the tires otherthan specified, or different type orsize, the vehicle skid control sys-tem may not function correctly.When replacing the tires or wheels,contact your Toyota dealer.

VEHICLE SKID CONTROL SYSTEMFAILURE WARNING

These lights warn that when there is aproblem somewhere in the vehicle skidcontrol system.

The lights will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON”, and will go off afterabout a few seconds.

If the “VSC” warning light and “VSC OFF”indicator light come on, the vehicle skidcontrol system does not work. However,as conventional braking operates when ap-plied, there is no problem to continue yourdriving.


� The “VSC” warning light and/or “VSCOFF” indicator light do/does not comeon after the ignition is turned to on.

� The “VSC” warning light and “VSCOFF” indicator light are left on after theignition is turned to on.

� The “VSC” warning light and “VSCOFF” indicator light comes on whiledriving without pushing “VSC OFF”switch.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

168

Parking brake

Type A

Type B

When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brakepedal. For better holding power, first de-press the brake pedal and hold it whilesetting the parking brake.To release: Depress the parking brakepedal while depressing the brake pedal.

To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light inthe instrument panel remains on until yourelease the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

Cruise controlThe cruise control allows you to cruisethe vehicle at a desired speed over 40km/h (25 mph) with your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintainedalthough a slight speed change may occurwhen driving up or down gradient, withinthe limits of engine performance. Onsteeper hills, a greater speed change willoccur so it is better to drive without thecruise control.

When the cruise control is on, the drivingpattern of the automatic transmission isfixed in the normal position, regardless ofthe position of the selector switch.


169

CAUTION

� To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use thecruise control when driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow- covered) orwinding roads.

� Avoid vehicle speed increases whendriving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thecruise control set speed, cancel thecruise control then downshift thetransmission to use engine brakingto slow down.

TURNING ON THE SYSTEM

To operate the cruise control, push “ON/OFF” button. This turns the system on.The indicator light in the instrument clus-ter shows that you can now set your de-sired cruising speed. Another push willturn the system completely off.

When the ignition key is turned off, thesystem automatically turned off. To usethe cruise control again, push “ON/OFF”button again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control en-gagement, keep the cruise controlsystem off when not using the cruisecontrol.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

170

SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

The transmission must be in “D” beforeyou set the cruise control speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push “COAST SET” button and release it.This sets the vehicle at that speed. If thespeed is not satisfactory, push “RES ACC”button for a faster speed, or push “SETCOAST” button for a slower speed. Eachpush changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe set speed. When you release it, thevehicle will return to the speed set priorto the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

You can cancel the preset speed by anyof the following:

a. Depressing the brake pedal.

b. Push “CANCEL” button and releasing it.

c. Pushing “ON/OFF” button.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will beautomatically cancelled.

If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the preset speed, the presetspeed will be also automatically cancelled.

If the preset speed automatically cancelsout for any other reasons, have your ve-hicle checked by your Toyota dealer at theearliest opportunity.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push ”RES ACC” button and hold it. Re-lease the button the desired speed is at-tained. While the button is pushed, thevehicle will gradually gain speed.

When the difference between the actualvehicle speed and the set speed is lessthan 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed canbe increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each timeby pushing “RES ACC” button quicklywithin 0.6 seconds.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-celerate the vehicle and then push“COAST SET” button.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push “COAST SET” button and hold it.Release the button when the desiredspeed is attained. While the button ispushed, the vehicle speed will graduallydecrease.

When the difference is 5 km/h (3 mph) ormore, the vehicle will cruise with its actu-al speed. When the difference between theactual vehicle speed and the set speed isless than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speedcan be lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) eachtime by pushing “COAST SET” buttonquickly within 0.6 seconds.


171

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push”COAST SET” button.

Even if you turn off the overdrive switchwith the cruise control on, engine brakingwill not be applied because the cruisecontrol is not cancelled. To decrease thevehicle speed, reset to a slower speedwith the cruise control button or depressthe brake pedal. If you use the brakepedal, cruise control is cancelled.

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by push-ing “CANCEL” button or by depressing thebrake pedal, pushing ”RES ACC” buttonwill restore the speed set prior to can-cellation. However, once the vehicle speedfalls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), thepreset speed will not be resumed.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If “CRUISE” indicator light in the instru-ment cluster flashes when using thecruise control, push “ON/OFF” button toturn the system off and then push it againto turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-curs, there is some trouble in the cruisecontrol system.

� The indicator light does not come on.

� The indicator light flashes again.

� The indicator light goes out after itcomes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyotadealer and have your vehicle inspected.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

172

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSCar audio systemReference 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Car audio system operating hints 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 7


173

Reference

Type 1: AM·FM ETR radio/cassette player/compact disc player/compact disc autochanger controller

Type 2: AM·FM ETR radio/cassette player/compact disc auto changer controller/compact disc auto changer

This section describes some of the basicfeatures on Toyota audio systems. Someinformation may not pertain to your sys-tem.

Your audio system works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off.

Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “CD” to turnon that function without pushing“PWR·VOL”.

You can turn on each player by insertinga cassette tape or compact disc.

You can turn off each player by ejectingthe cassette tape or compact disc. If theaudio system was previously off, then theentire audio system will be turned offwhen you eject the cassette tape or com-pact disc. If the another function was pre-viously playing, it will come on again.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “CD” if thesystem is already on but you want toswitch from one function to another.

Using your audio system——Some basics

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

174

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone andbalance controls, see the description ofyour own system.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble, midrange, and bass levels. Infact, different kinds of music and vocalprograms usually sound better with differ-ent mixes of treble, midrange and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has an antenna printed onthe inside of the rear window.

NOTICE

Attaching the film (especially conduc-tive or metallic type) on the rear win-dow will noticeably reduce the sensi-tivity of the radio.

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

When you insert a cassette, the exposedtape should be to the right.

NOTICE

Do not oil any part of the player anddo not insert anything other than cas-sette tapes into the slot, or the tapeplayer may be damaged.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER

When you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up. (The player willautomatically eject a disc if the label sideis down.) The compact disc player willplay from track 1 through the end of thedisc. Then it will play from track 1 again.On models with the compact disc autochanger, next disc will be played fromtrack 1.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything except a compactdisc into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(5 in.) discs only.


175

Details of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallisting that follows.

—Controls and features�Type 1

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

176

Preset buttons

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station (see “TUNE” or “SEEK”button). Push and hold down the buttonuntil you hear a beep—this will set thestation to the button. The button numberwill appear on the display.

To tune in to a preset station: Push thebutton for the station you want. The but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM” “FM”).

(Eject button)

Push the cassette tape eject button toeject a cassette. Push the compact disceject button to eject a compact disc.

After you turn the ignition to “LOCK”, youwill be able to eject a cassette or disc,but you will not be able to reinsert it.

PROG (Program)

Push “ ” to select the other side of acassette tape. The display indicates whichside is currently selected (“ ” indicates

top side, “ ” indicates bottom side).

Auto- reverse feature: After the cassetteplayer reaches the end of a tape side, itautomatically reverses and begins to playthe other side. This is true whether thecassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast forward button)

Cassette Player

Push the fast forward button to fast for-ward a cassette tape. “ ” will appearon the display. Push the reverse button torewind a tape. “ ” will appear on thedisplay.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-ing, push the fast forward button or“TAPE”; to stop the tape while it is re-winding, push the reverse button or“TAPE”.

If a tape side rewinds completely, the cas-sette player will stop and then play thatsame side. If a tape fast forwards com-pletely, the cassette player will play theother side of the tape, using the auto- re-verse feature.

Compact Disc Player

If you want to fast forward or reversethrough a compact disc track, push andhold in the fast forward or reverse button.When you release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.

AM

Push “AM” to turn on the radio and selectthe AM band. “AM” will appear on thedisplay.

If the audio system is off, you can turnon the radio by pushing “AM”. Also, push“AM” to switch from cassette or compactdisc operation to radio operation.


177

AUDIO CTRL / MODE (Audio controland mode adjustment)

Manual tone adjustment function—

This knob is used to adjust the tonemanually.

For low- pitch tone adjustment, push“AUDIO CTRL / MODE” repeatedly until“BASS” appears on the display. Then turnthe knob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from“BASS -5” to “BASS 5”.

For middle- pitch tone adjustment, push“AUDIO CTRL / MODE” repeatedly until“MID” appears on the display. Then turnthe knob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from “MID- 5” to “MID 5”.

For high- pitch tone adjustment, push“AUDIO CTRL / MODE” repeatedly until“TREB” appears on the display. Then turnthe knob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from“TREB -5” to “TREB 5”.

Sound balance adjustment function—

This knob is also used to adjust thesound balance between the front and rear,and the right and left speakers.

For front/rear adjustment, push “AUDIOCTRL / MODE” repeatedly until “FADE”appears on the display. Then turn theknob to adjust the front/rear balance.

The display will show the range from“FADE FRONT 7” to “FADE REAR 7”.

For left/right adjustment, push “AUDIOCTRL / MODE” repeatedly until “BAL” ap-pears on the display. Then turn the knobto adjust the left/right balance.

The display will show the range from “BALLEFT 7” to “BAL RIGHT 7”.

CD (Compact Disc)

Push “CD” to switch from radio or cas-sette operation to compact disc operation.If the audio system is off, you can turnon the compact disc player by pushing“CD”. In both cases, a disc must alreadybe loaded in the player.

When the audio is set into compact discoperation, the display shows the track or,track and disc number currently beingplayed. Each time you push “CD”, thesystem changes to the automatic changer.

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display one of the six followingerror messages.

If “WAIT” appears on the display, it indi-cates that the inside of the player unitmay be too hot due to the very high ambi-ent temperature. Remove the disc or mag-azine from the player and allow the playerto cool down.

If “Err 1” appears on the display, itindicates the disc is dirty, damaged, or itwas inserted up- side down. Clean thedisc or insert it correctly.

If “Err 2” appears on the display, itindicates no disc is loaded inside themagazine. Insert a disc.

If “Err 3” or “Err 4” appears on thedisplay, it indicates there is a trouble in-side the system. Eject the disc or maga-zine. Set the disc or magazine again.

If “OPEn” appears on the display, itindicates the compact disc auto changerlid is open. Close the compact disc autochanger lid.

If the malfunction is not rectified, takeyour vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

178

DISC

Compact disc auto changer only—

By using this button, you can select adisc you wish to listen to.

Push either side of the button until thenumber of the disc you want to listen toappears on the display.

Dolby � B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby� B Noise Reduction,push the button marked with the double- Dsymbol. The double- D symbol will appearon the display. Push the button again toturn off Dolby� B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used forrecording the tape.∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

FM

Push “FM” to turn on the radio and selectthe FM band. “FM1” or “FM2” will appearon the display. This system allows you toset twelve FM stations, two for each but-ton.

If the audio system is off, you can turnon the radio by pushing “FM”. Also, push“FM” to switch from cassette or compactdisc operation to radio operation.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RND (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on all the com-pact discs in the magazine in random or-der, or only listen to the tracks on aspecific compact disc in random order.

To randomly play the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “ ”. “ ”will appear on the display. The disc youare listening to will play in random order.If you hear a beep, you held the buttontoo long, and the player will play all thetracks in the magazine in random order.To turn off the random feature, push thisbutton again.


To randomly play all the tracks in themagazine:Push and hold “ ” until you hear abeep. “ ” will appear on the displayand the player will perform all the trackson all the discs in the magazine in ran-dom order. To turn off the random feature,push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette Player

Push “ ” while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically berewound and replayed. This process willbe continued until you push the buttonagain to turn off the repeat feature.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.


179

Compact Disc Player

There are two repeat features—You caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “ ” while thetrack is playing. “ ” will appear on thedisplay. If you hear a beep, you held thebutton too long, and the player will repeatthe whole disc. When the track ends, itwill automatically be replayed. This pro-cess will be continued until you push thebutton again to turn off the repeat feature.


Repeating a disc:Push and hold “ ” until you hear abeep. “ ” will appear on the display.The player will repeat all the tracks on thedisc you are listening to. When the discends, the player will automatically go backto the top track of the disc and replay.This process will be continued until youpush the button again to turn off the re-peat feature.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold “SCAN” until you hear abeep. The radio will tune in the next pres-et station up the band, stay there for 5seconds, and then move to the next pre-set station. To select a station, push“SCAN” again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release “SCAN”. If youhear a beep, you held the button too long,and the radio will scan the preset sta-tions. The radio will find the next stationup the station band, stay there for 5 se-conds, and then scan again. To select astation, push “SCAN” again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”will appear on the display and the playerwill scan all the tracks on the disc youare listening to. If you hear a beep, youheld the button too long, and the playerwill scan the first track of all the discs inthe magazine. To select a track, push“SCAN” again. If the player scanned allthe tracks on the disc, it will stop scan-ning.


Scanning the first track of all the discs inthe magazine:Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.“ ·SCAN” will appear on the display

and the player will perform the first trackof the next disc. To select a disc, pushthe “SCAN” again. If the player hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

180

SEEK (Seeking)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease the “�” or “�” side of “SEEK”.Do this again to find the station after that.

If you push and hold the “�” or “�” sideof “SEEK”, the radio will continue seekingup or down for stations and will stop atthe next station that it finds after the but-ton is released. on reception. Press thebutton again to resume the search.

Cassette Player

By using this button, you can skip up ordown to a different track.

You can skip up to nine tracks at a time.

Push the up or down side of the button.From “SEEK +9” to “SEEK -9” will appearon the display.

Next, push either side of the track buttonuntil the number on the display reachesthe number of tracks you want to skip. Ifyou push the button ten times, the skipfeature will be turned off.

When counting the number of tracks youwant to rewind, remember to count thecurrent track as well. For example, if youwant to rewind to a song that is two be-fore the song you are listening to, pushon the down side of the button until “REW3” appears on the display.

If you have pushed the track button morethan you wanted to, push the other sideof the button. The track number will bereduced.

The track number you select is not validif it is higher than the number of tracksremaining on the current cassette side.

� After the beginning of the tape isreached, the player will automaticallystart playing the same side.

� After the end of the tape is reached,the player will automatically reversesides and start playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks for the track buttonto work correctly. In addition, the featuremay not work well with some spokenword, live, or classical recordings.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TAPE

Push “TAPE” to switch from radio or com-pact disc operation to cassette operation.If the audio system is off, you can turnon the cassette player by pushing “TAPE”.In both cases, a cassette must already beloaded in the player.

TRACK (Track up/down button): Compact disc player


Push either side of the track button untilthe number of the track you want to listento appears on the display. If you want toreturn to the beginning of the currenttrack, push the down side of the buttonone time, quickly.


181

TUNE (Tuning)

Your Toyota has an electronic tuning radio(ETR). Push and release the “�” or “�”side of “TUNE” to step up or down thestation band. Do this again to find anotherfrequency.

If you push and hold the “�” or “�” sideof “TUNE”, the radio will continue seekingup or down for frequencies and will stopat the next frequency that it finds after thebutton is released. Press the button againto resume the search.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

182

Details of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallisting that follows.

�Type 2


183

Preset buttons

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station (see “TUNE” or “SEEK”button). Push and hold down the buttonuntil you hear a beep—this will set thestation to the button. The button numberwill appear on the display.

To tune in to a preset station: Push thebutton for the station you want. The but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM” “FM”).

(Eject button)

Cassette tape

Push the cassette tape eject button toeject a cassette.

After you turn the ignition to “LOCK”, youwill be able to eject a cassette, but youwill not be able to reinsert it.

Compact disc

To eject one compact disc only: Push andrelease the compact disc eject button. Ifyou hold the button too long (if the audiosystem is on at this time, you hear abeep.), the mechanism will change to themode for ejecting all the discs loaded inthe changer. You can also eject any spe-cific one of the discs loaded in the chang-er as follows:

1. Push either side of the “DISC” buttonuntil the number of the disc you wantto eject is displayed.

2. Push and release the compact disceject button.

To eject all the discs loaded in the chang-er: Push and hold the compact disc ejectbutton (until you hear a beep when theaudio system is on). The last compactdisc played before pushing the button willbe ejected first. If a disc is left in the slotfor a long time, the function to eject allthe discs will be automatically cancelled.

After you turn the ignition to “LOCK”, youwill be able to eject one compact disconly or all the discs loaded in the chang-er, but you will not be able to reinsert itor them.

PROG (Program)

Push “ ” to select the other side of acassette tape. The display indicates whichside is currently selected (“�” indicates topside, “�” indicates bottom side).

Auto- reverse feature: After the cassetteplayer reaches the end of a tape side, itautomatically reverses and begins to playthe other side. This is true whether thecassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast forward button)

Cassette Player

Push the fast forward button to fast for-ward a cassette tape. “ ” will appearon the display. Push the reverse button torewind a tape. “ ” will appear on thedisplay.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-ing, push the fast forward button or“TAPE”; to stop the tape while it is re-winding, push the reverse button or“TAPE”.

If a tape side rewinds completely, the cas-sette player will stop and then play thatsame side. If a tape fast forwards com-pletely, the cassette player will play theother side of the tape, using the auto- re-verse feature.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

184

Compact Disc Player

If you want to fast forward or reversethrough a compact disc track, push andhold in the fast forward or reverse button.When you release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.

AM

Push “AM” to turn on the radio and selectthe AM band. “AM” will appear on thedisplay.

If the audio system is off, you can turnon the radio by pushing “AM”. Also, push“AM” to switch from cassette or compactdisc operation to radio operation.

AUDIO CTRL / MODE (Audio controland mode adjustment)

Manual tone adjustment function—

This knob is used to adjust the tonemanually.

For low- pitch tone adjustment, push“AUDIO CTRL / MODE” repeatedly until“BASS” appears on the display. Then turnthe knob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from“BASS -5” to “BASS 5”.

For middle- pitch tone adjustment, push“AUDIO CTRL / MODE” repeatedly until“MID” appears on the display. Then turnthe knob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from “MID- 5” to “MID 5”.

For high- pitch tone adjustment, push“AUDIO CTRL / MODE” repeatedly until“TREB” appears on the display. Then turnthe knob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from“TREB -5” to “TREB 5”.

Sound balance adjustment function—

This knob is also used to adjust thesound balance between the front and rear,and the right and left speakers.

For front/rear adjustment, push “AUDIOCTRL / MODE” repeatedly until “FADE”appears on the display. Then turn theknob to adjust the front/rear balance.

The display will show the range from“FADE FRONT 7” to “FADE REAR 7”.

For left/right adjustment, push “AUDIOCTRL / MODE” repeatedly until “BAL” ap-pears on the display. Then turn the knobto adjust the left/right balance.

The display will show the range from “BALLEFT 7” to “BAL RIGHT 7”.

CD (Compact Disc)

Push “CD” to switch from radio or cas-sette operation to compact disc operation.If the audio system is off, you can turnon the compact disc player by pushing“CD”. In both cases, a disc must alreadybe loaded in the player.

When the audio is set into compact discoperation, the display shows the track or,track and disc number currently beingplayed.

If the player or another unit equipped withthe player malfunctions, your audio systemwill display one of the six following errormessages.

If “WAIT” appears on the display, it indi-cates that the inside of the player unitmay be too hot due to the very high ambi-ent temperature. Remove the disc or mag-azine from the player and allow the playerto cool down.

If “Err 1” appears on the display, itindicates the disc is dirty, damaged, or itwas inserted up- side down. Clean thedisc or insert it correctly.

If “Err 2” appears on the display, itindicates no disc is loaded inside themagazine. Insert a disc.


185

If “Err 3” or “Err 4” appears on thedisplay, it indicates there is a trouble in-side the system. Eject the disc or maga-zine. Set the disc or magazine again.

If “OPEn” appears on the display, itindicates the compact disc auto changerlid is open. Close the compact disc autochanger lid.

If the malfunction is not rectified, takeyour vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

DISC

By using this button, you can select adisc you wish to listen to.

Push either side of the button until thenumber of the disc you want to listen toappears on the display.

Dolby � B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby� B Noise Reduction,push the button marked with the double- Dsymbol. The double- D symbol will appearon the display. Push the button again toturn off Dolby� B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used forrecording the tape.

∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

FM

Push “FM” to turn on the radio and selectthe FM band. “FM1” or “FM2” will appearon the display. This system allows you toset twelve FM stations, two for each but-ton.

If the audio system is off, you can turnon the radio by pushing “FM”. Also, push“FM” to switch from cassette or compactdisc operation to radio operation.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compactdiscs in the compact disc auto changerwhich is integrated with the radio and cas-sette player. This compact disc autochanger can store up to 6 discs.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

Loading one compact disc only—

To load one compact disc only, quicklypush and release the button. If you holdthe button too long (if the audio systemis on at this time, you hear a beep.), themechanism will change to the mode forloading multiple compact discs. Afterpushing the button, insert a compact disc.After the disc is loaded, the shutter of theslot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

Loading multiple compact discs—

To load multiple compact discs, push andhold (until you hear a beep when the au-dio system is on). After pushing the but-ton, insert the first compact disc. After thedisc is loaded, the shutter of the slot willclose. After a few seconds, the shutterwill automatically open again so the nextdisc can be inserted. The same processcan be applied for loading the rest of thediscs.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

186

MSG (Message)

This button is used to display a radio textmessage. It is also used to store andrecall radio text messages.

To receive radio text, turn RDS on (see“RDS”), and tune to an RDS station thatbroadcasts radio text messages. When theradio receives a radio test message,“MSG” will appear on the display. Pushthis button at this time to display the radiotext message. The message display willbe canceled if you activate any functionthat affects the display. After the entiremessage has been displayed, the mes-sage will disappear. To view the messageagain, push this button a second time.

To store a radio text message, push andhold this button for more than 1.7 secondswhile the message is being displayed. Abeep will sound, indicating that the mes-sage has been stored. At this time “MSGSTORED” appears on the display. Up tothree 64- character messages can bestored. If 3 messages are already in stor-age, the oldest message will be removedto make room for a new message.

To recall a radio text message, push thisbutton for less than 1.7 seconds. Themost recently received stored messagewill appear on the display, even if it hasalready been displayed. Pushing this but-ton for less than 1.7 seconds while themost recent message is being displayedwill recall the newest stored message. If2 or more messages have been stored,the other stored messages will be toggledthrough each time you push this button(while a stored message is on display).

If no messages have been stored, or ifthere are no more messages to be re-called, “NO MSG STORED” will appear onthe display, and the message display willbe canceled. The display then returns toshow the program service name. Themessage display will be canceled if youactivate any function that affects the dis-play.Message display can be canceled bypressing any of the following buttons:“AM”, “FM”, “CD”, “TAPE”, “LOAD”,“SEEK”, “TUNE”, any preset, “SCAN”, anyaudio control, “RDS”, “SRCH”, or “<PROGTYPES>”. If the current station is not atraffic program and traffic announcementsis off, pushing “TRAF” will cancel the dis-play. The message will be canceled afterthe entire message has been displayed.

<PROG TYPES> (Program Types)

This button is used for program type(PTY) search of RDS stations. 32 programtypes are available as listed here.

By pushing this button, RDS is turned onif it was off (“RDS” will display), and theradio is switched to FM type mode. Ifprogram type search has not previouslyperformed, the radio will start a programtype search (see “SRCH” for details onprogram type search).

If a program type search has previouslybeen performed in FM1 or FM2, the radiowill return to the last active program type.

If you are already in FM type mode anda program type is not already being dis-played, pushing this button will recall thedisplay for the current program type.

After a program type is being displayed,subsequent pushes within 3 seconds willtoggle through the available programtypes. Pushing the right or left arrowsrepeatedly will increment or decrement thedisplay through the available programtypes in alphabetical order.

If a type search was started, it can becanceled as described in “SRCH.”


187

Program Type List

The following program type names areavailable. After a program type search,the radio will display one of the followingprogram types for 3 seconds, then theprogram type name for 3 seconds (ifavailable). After that, it will display theprogram service name (subject to an8- character limit) of the current station.The following table lists each display andits program type.

Display Program type (PTY)

None 0

News 1

Inform 2

Sports 3

Talk 4

Rock 5

Cls Rock 6

Adlt Hit 7

Soft Rck 8

Top 40 9

Country 10

Oldies 11

Soft 12

Display Program type (PTY)

Nostalga 13

Jazz 14

Classicl 15

R & B 16

Soft R&B 17

Language 18

Rel Musc 19

Rel Talk 20

Persnlty 21

Public 22

College 23

PTY- 24 24

PTY- 25 25

PTY- 26 26

PTY- 27 27

PTY- 28 28

Weather 29

Test 30

Alert! 31

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RDS (Radio Data System)

If the FM radio, cassette player or com-pact disc player is on, pushing this buttonwill turn RDS on or off.

Turning RDS on will display “RDS” andother appropriate RDS displays including“<TRAF>”, “TYPE” and “MSG”. If the radiois tuned to an RDS station, the programservice name, such as “ROCK 107”, willappear on the display.

When RDS is turned on, various types ofinformation are displayed. These includethe program type (PTY) currently beingbroadcast, the program service name, traf-fic announcements and emergency alertmessage. There are five buttons that con-trol RDS: “RDS”, “SRCH”, “<PROGTYPES>”, “TRAF” and “MSG”. (See eachbutton’s description in this alphabeticallisting.) Emergency alert message isbroadcast when the audio is on even ifthe RDS function is turned off (see “Alert!display”). RDS is also turned on if theaudio system is on by pushing other RDSbuttons except “MSG”.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

188

“Alert!” display

The alert program type sends emergencyalert messages. The radio will receivealert messages if it is on and tuned to anRDS station, or if the previous station wasan RDS station. If the radio receives analert announcement, it will interrupt theprevious mode, display “Alert!,” adjust thevolume to Traffic Announcement level, andbroadcast the alert. Then, it will return tothe previous mode and volume level.

An alert message in progress can be can-celled by activating any function. However,the PTY- 31 interrupt feature can only beturned off by turning off the ignition.

RND (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on all the com-pact discs in the magazine in random or-der, or only listen to the tracks on aspecific compact disc in random order.

To randomly play the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “ ”. “ ”will appear on the display. The disc youare listening to will play in random order.If you hear a beep, you held the buttontoo long, and the player will play all thetracks in the magazine in random order.To turn off the random feature, push thisbutton again.

To randomly play all the tracks in themagazine:Push and hold “ ” until you hear abeep. “ ” will appear on the displayand the player will perform all the trackson all the discs in the magazine in ran-dom order. To turn off the random feature,push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette Player

Push “ ” while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically berewound and replayed. This process willbe continued until you push the buttonagain to turn off the repeat feature.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.

Compact Disc Player

There are two repeat features—You caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “ ” while thetrack is playing. “ ” will appear on thedisplay. If you hear a beep, you held thebutton too long, and the player will repeatthe whole disc. When the track ends, itwill automatically be replayed. This pro-cess will be continued until you push thebutton again to turn off the repeat feature.

Repeating a disc:Push and hold “ ” until you hear abeep. “ ” will appear on the display.The player will repeat all the tracks on thedisc you are listening to. When the discends, the player will automatically go backto the top track of the disc and replay.This process will be continued until youpush the button again to turn off the re-peat feature.


189

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold “SCAN” until you hear abeep. The radio will tune in the next pres-et station up the band, stay there for 5seconds, and then move to the next pre-set station. To select a station, push“SCAN” again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release “SCAN”. If youhear a beep, you held the button too long,and the radio will scan the preset sta-tions. The radio will find the next stationup the station band, stay there for 5 se-conds, and then scan again. To select astation, push “SCAN” again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”will appear on the display and the playerwill scan all the tracks on the disc youare listening to. If you hear a beep, youheld the button too long, and the playerwill scan the first track of all the discs inthe magazine. To select a track, push“SCAN” again. If the player scanned allthe tracks on the disc, it will stop scan-ning.

Scanning the first track of all the discs inthe magazine:Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.“DSCAN” will appear on the display andthe player will perform the first track ofthe next disc. To select a disc, push the“SCAN” again. If the player has scannedall the discs, it will stop scanning.

SEEK (Seeking)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease the “�” or “�” side of “SEEK”.Do this again to find the station after that.

If you push and hold the “�” or “�” sideof “SEEK”, the radio will continue seekingup or down for stations and will stop atthe next station that it finds after the but-ton is released. on reception. Press thebutton again to resume the search.

Cassette Player


You can skip up to nine tracks at a time.

Push the up or down side of the button.From “SEEK +9” to “SEEK -9” will appearon the display.

Next, push either side of the track buttonuntil the number on the display reachesthe number of tracks you want to skip. Ifyou push the button ten times, the skipfeature will be turned off.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

190

When counting the number of tracks youwant to rewind, remember to count thecurrent track as well. For example, if youwant to rewind to a song that is two be-fore the song you are listening to, pushon the down side of the button until “REW3” appears on the display.

If you have pushed the track button morethan you wanted to, push the other sideof the button. The track number will bereduced.

The track number you select is not validif it is higher than the number of tracksremaining on the current cassette side.

� After the beginning of the tape isreached, the player will automaticallystart playing the same side.

� After the end of the tape is reached,the player will automatically reversesides and start playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks for the track buttonto work correctly. In addition, the featuremay not work well with some spokenword, live, or classical recordings.

SRCH (Search)

This button allows you to search all avail-able RDS stations out of the entire FMband and sort them by program type (see“<PROG TYPES>” for details on programtypes).

By pushing this button, RDS is turned onif it was off (“RDS” will display). The radiois switched to FM type mode. During theprogram type search, “SEARCHING....” willshow on the display. Also at this time,“FM” and “TYPE” will appear on the dis-play to indicate that the preset buttons arefor program type presets.

After searching for all available RDS sta-tions, the radio will activate the previouslyactive program type. If the previously ac-tive program type is not available, or ifthe radio has not yet performed a programtype search, the radio will activate thefirst program type, in alphabetical order,that has stations in memory. The radio willpreset the stations of the current programtype into the preset buttons.

If more than 6 stations of a program typeare found, the radio will create a secondbank of presets, such as “Rock 1” and“Rock 2”. These are accessible throughthe “<PROG TYPES>” button. If more than12 stations are found, the radio will loadthe 12 strongest stations of the programtype into the presets.

After the search is complete, the radio willdisplay the number of RDS stations foundfor 3 seconds: for example, “Found 19RDS.” The radio will then display the se-lected program type for 3 seconds: forexample, “ROCK.” After the program typehas been displayed for 3 seconds, theradio will display the program type namefor 3 seconds. After that, the radio willdisplay the program service name.

Day mode (headlights off): The radio willonly display the number of presets thathave a frequency for the selected programtype. For example, if program type Rockis selected, and there are three rock sta-tions, only preset numbers 1, 2 and 3 willbe displayed. The remaining preset num-bers will not be displayed and the remain-ing presets will have no function.

Night mode (headlights on): In addition tothe display described for day mode, theradio will illuminate the jewels of the pre-sets that have stations available. The re-maining presets will have no function.


191

A type search in progress can be can-celed by pushing the following buttons:“SEEK”, “TUNE”, “SCAN”, “AM”, “FM”, anypreset button, “CD” (if CD mode is avail-able), “TAPE” (if tape mode is available),“RDS”, “SRCH”, “<PROG TYPES>”,“TRAF”, or “LOAD”. If any of these but-tons is pressed, the search will be can-celed and the appropriate function started.Inserting a tape can also cancel thesearch.

If no RDS stations are found, “FOUND 0RDS” will display and the radio will returnto the previous FM mode and frequency.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TAPE

Push “TAPE” to switch from radio or com-pact disc operation to cassette operation.If the audio system is off, you can turnon the cassette player by pushing “TAPE”.In both cases, a cassette must already beloaded in the player.

TRACK (Track up/down button): Compact disc player


Push either side of the track button untilthe number of the track you want to listento appears on the display. If you want toreturn to the beginning of the currenttrack, push the down side of the buttonone time, quickly.

TRAF (Traffic)

This button turns the traffic announcement(TA) feature on and off. This button canoperate in RDS mode, or if the FM radio,cassette player or compact disc player ison.

By pushing this button, RDS is turned onif it was off (“RDS” will display), and traf-fic announcement feature is on. “TRAF”appears on the display when the radio istuned to a traffic station. When the trafficannouncement feature is on, “< >” will bedisplayed around “TRAF” (“<TRAF>”).

If the current station is not a traffic sta-tion, the radio will start a traffic programsearch in increasing frequency order. Dur-ing a traffic program search, “Seek Traffic”will display. If no traffic programs arefound, “No Traf Info” will display.

If the radio receives a traffic announce-ment, it will interrupt the cassette playeror compact disc mode (if either one wason), adjust the volume to Traffic An-nouncement level, and broadcast the traf-fic announcement. During a traffic an-nouncement, “Traf Announce” will appearon the display. After traffic announcement,it will return to the previous mode andvolume level.

TA volume memory function—The volumewhen receiving the traffic announcement ismemorized.

When “TA” is received next time, the sys-tem compares the volume before “TA” isreceived and the memorized TA volumeand automatically selects the louder vol-ume. However, the range of volumememory is limited: if the volume receivedpreviously is less than the minimum, thisvolume will be the minimum range.

You can adjust the volume independentlyfrom the memorized TA volume rangewhile receiving a TA station.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

192

Traffic announcement can be canceled byturning RDS off, or pressing the “TRAF”button again.

TUNE (Tuning)

Your Toyota has an electronic tuning radio(ETR). Push and release the “�” or “�”side of “TUNE” to step up or down thestation band. Do this again to find anotherfrequency.

If you push and hold the “�” or “�” sideof “TUNE”, the radio will continue seekingup or down for frequencies and will stopat the next frequency that it finds after thebutton is released. Press the button againto resume the search.

NOTICE

To ensure the correct audio systemoperation:

� Be careful not to spill beveragesover the audio system.

� Do not put anything other than acassette tape or Compact Disc intothe slot.

� The use of cellular phone inside ornear the vehicle may cause a noisefrom the speakers of the audio sys-tem which you are listening to.However, this does not indicate amalfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range. The farther you arefrom a station, the weaker its signal willbe. In addition, reception conditionschange constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi- path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

Car audio system operatinghints


193

AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere- especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYERAND TAPES

For the best performance for your cas-sette player and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regu-larly.

� A dirty tape head or tape path candecrease sound quality and tangle yourcassette tapes. The easiest way toclean them is by using a cleaning tape.

Use high- quality cassettes.

� Low- quality cassette tapes can causemany problems, including poor sound,inconsistent playing speed, andconstant auto- reversing. They can alsoget stuck or tangled in the cassetteplayer.

� Do not use a cassette if it has beendamaged or tangled or if its label ispeeling off.

� Do not leave a cassette in the playerif you are not listening to it, especiallyif it is hot outside.

� Store cassettes in their cases and outof direct sunlight.

� Avoid using cassettes with a total play-ing time longer than 100 minutes (50minutes per side). The tape used inthese cassettes is thin and could getstuck or tangled in the cassette player.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER AND DISCS

� Use only compact discs labeled asshown.

� Extremely high temperatures can keepyour compact disc player from working.On hot days, use the air conditioningto cool the vehicle interior before youlisten to a disc.

� Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your compact disc player skip.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

194

� If moisture gets into your compact discplayer, you may not hear any soundeven though your compact disc playerappears to be working. Remove thedisc from the player and wait until itdries.

� Your automatic changer or compactdisc player cannot play special shapedor low- quality compact discs such asthose shown here. Do not use them asthe changer or player could be dam-aged.

� Handle compact discs carefully, espe-cially when you are inserting them.Hold them on the edge and do notbend them. Avoid getting fingerprintson them, particularly on the shiny side.

� Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa track. (To see a pin hole, hold thedisc up to the light.)

� Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not listening tothem. Store them in their plastic casesaway from moisture, heat, and directsunlight.

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with asoft, lint- free cloth that has been damp-ened with water. Wipe in a straight linefrom the center to the edge of the disc(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,lint- free cloth. Do not use a conventionalrecord cleaner or anti- static device.


195

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisiblelaser beam which could cause hazard-ous radiation exposure if directedoutside the unit. Be sure to operatethe player correctly.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

196

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSAir conditioning systemManual air conditioning system

Controls 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic air conditioning systemControls 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side vents 211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning filter 211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 8


197

1. Temperature Selector (mainly for driver and secondarily forfront passenger)

2. Air Intake Selector

3. “A/C” Button

4. Temperature Selector (mainly for front passenger and secondarily for driver)

5. Air Flow Selector

6. Fan Speed Selector

Manual air conditioning system——Controls

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

198

Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—tothe right to increase, to the left to de-crease.

Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—to the right to warm, to the left to cool.

Knowledge for the two- temperature se-lector operation

This air conditioning system has two inde-pendent temperature selectors: left andright (for the use of driver and front pas-senger respectively).

� There are cases where the temperatureof the airflow may not accurately corre-late on the driver and front passengerside according to circumstances, evenif the left and right temperature selec-tors are set at the same temperature.If this situation occurs, use the finetune operation to adjust the air temper-ature on one side.

Note: This manual dual temperature se-lectors should generally only be usedas independent temperature settings forthe left and right.

� There are cases where one or both ofthe airflow temperatures may not accu-rately correlate with the set tempera-ture according to circumstances, whenthe airflow temperature settings on theleft and right are substantially different.For example, if the left controller is setat central or neutral temperature whilethe right one is set at maximum heat-ing or maximum cooling, or vice versa.If this situation occurs, use the finetune operation to adjust the air temper-ature on each side.

Air flow selector

Turn the knob to select the vents used forair flow.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from theinstrument panel vents.

2. Bi- level— Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

When you set the temperature selectorsetting at about the center, warm airflows out of the floor vents and rela-tively low- temperature air flows out ofthe center and side vents.

3. Floor— Air flows mainly from the floorvents.


199

4. Floor/Windshield— Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

Turning the air flow selector to thefloor/windshield position turns on thedefogging function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clearsthe front view more quickly.

5. Windshield— Air flows mainly from thewindshield vents.

Turning the air flow selector to thewindshield position turns on the defog-ging function with the purpose of clear-ing the front view.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clearsthe front view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “—Air flow selector settings” de-scribed below.

Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.An indicator light will illuminate to showwhich air intake mode is being selected.

1. Recirculate— Recirculates the air insidethe vehicle.

2. Fresh— Draws outside air into the sys-tem.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

200

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, thereis a problem in the air conditioning systemand the air conditioning automaticallyshuts off. If this happens, take your ve-hicle to your Toyota dealer for service.


201

—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips� To cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, turn the fan speed se-lector to adjust the fan speed high fora minute to help clear the intake ductsof snow or moisture. This can reducethe amount of fogging on the windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except “OFF”.

On some models

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

202

� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed— Any setting except “OFF”Temperature— Towards WARM

(red zone) Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air flow—FLOOR Air conditioning—OFF

� For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

� Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

� Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning


Fan speed— Any setting except “OFF”Temperature— Towards COLD

(blue zone) Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air flow—PANEL Air conditioning—ON

� For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.

Ventilation


Fan speed— Any setting except “OFF”Temperature— Towards COLD

(blue zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air flow—PANEL Air conditioning—OFF


203

Defogging

The inside of the windshield



(red zone) to heat;COLD (blue zone) tocool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defogging function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-shield or floor/windshield position, the airintake selects FRESH automatically. Thisis to clean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting to RE-CIRCULATE mode, press the air intakeselector button once again.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidifiedheating or cooling. This setting clears thefront view more quickly.

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

Defrosting

The outside of the windshield



(red zone) Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defrosting function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-shield or floor/windshield position, the airintake selects FRESH automatically. Thisis to clean up the front view more quickly.



� To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

204

1. “AUTO” Button

2. “OFF” Button

3. Air Intake Selector

4. Windshield Air Flow Button

5. “A/C” Button

6. “DUAL” Button

7. Temperature Selector (Only for the independent mode that display shows “DUAL”; mainly for frontpassenger and secondarily for driver)

8. “MODE” Button (air flow selector)

9. Fan Speed Selector

10. Temperature Selector(At the independent mode that displayshows “DUAL”; mainly for driver and secondarily for front passenger)(At the linked mode that display doesnot show “DUAL”; for driver)

Automatic air conditioning system——Controls


205

“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-tioning, press the “AUTO” button. “AUTO”will appear on the display to show thatthe automatic operation mode has beenselected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed, air flow, air intake and on- off ofthe air conditioning according to the tem-perature.

When you press the “AUTO” button withthe air intake mode at FRESH, internalcirculation may be applied for maximumcooling.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

To turn off the automatic operation, pressthe “OFF” button.

Fan speed selector

Push the “>” (increase) or “<” (decrease)side of the button to adjust the fan speed.

In automatic operation, you do not haveto adjust the fan speed unless you desireanother fan speed mode.

Temperature selector

To increase the temperature, press the“�” side, to decrease it, press the “�”side.

“MAX COLD” appears when you adjust tomaximum cooling, and “MAX HOT” whenyou adjust to maximum warming.

The temperature display changes between“�C” and “�F” when the unit of the outsidetemperature gauge is changed.

“DUAL” button

This switch is used to set the tempera-tures independently for the driver’s seatand front passenger seat.

Pushing the button changes the modefrom independent and linked.

Independent mode: Temperatures can beset independently for the driver’s seat andfront passenger’s seat. “DUAL” will appearon the display to show that the indepen-dent mode has been selected.

Linked mode: The same temperature isset for the driver’s seat and front passen-ger’s seat.

When the temperature for the front pas-senger’s seat is changed in linked mode,the mode is changed automatically to in-dependent mode.

Knowledge for the two- temperature se-lector operation

This air conditioning system has two inde-pendent temperature selectors: left andright (for the use of driver and front pas-senger respectively).

� There are cases where the temperatureof the airflow may not accurately corre-late on the driver and front passengerside according to circumstances, evenif the left and right temperature selec-tors are set at the same temperature.If this situation occurs, use the finetune operation to adjust the air temper-ature on one side.

� There are cases where one or both ofthe airflow temperatures may not accu-rately correlate with the set tempera-ture according to circumstances, whenthe airflow temperature settings on theleft and right are substantially different.For example, if the left controller is setat central or neutral temperature whilethe right one is set at maximum heat-ing or maximum cooling, or vice versa.If this situation occurs, use the finetune operation to adjust the air temper-ature on each side.

“OFF” button

Push the “OFF” button to turn off the airconditioning system.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

206

“MODE” button (air flow selector)

Push the “MODE” button to select thevents used for air flow.

In automatic operation, you do not haveto select the air flow unless you desireanother air flow mode.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from theinstrument panel vents.

2. Bi- level— Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

When you set the temperature selectorsetting at about the middle in automaticoperation, warm air flows out of thefloor vents and relatively low- tempera-ture air flows out of the center andside vents.

3. Floor— Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield— Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

Use with the air intake selector posi-tioned in FRESH.


Windshield air flow button

When this button is pressed, air flowsmainly from the windshield vents andturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

Pressing this button once again returnsthe air flow mode to the last one used.

This button allows the air intake to selectFRESH automatically. This is to clean upthe front view more quickly. If you wantto return the setting to RECIRCULATEmode, press the air intake selector buttononce again.



207


Air intake selector

The air intake selector button is used toswitch the air intake FRESH mode thatdraws outside air into the system and RE-CIRCULATED mode that recirculates theair inside vehicle.

Press the button to select the air source.The air intake mode which is being se-lected is shown on the display.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

For example, when the ambient tempera-ture is low, the air intake mode maychange automatically to FRESH. This isnot a malfunction.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, thereis a problem in the air conditioning systemand the air conditioning automaticallyshuts off. If this happens, take your ve-hicle to your Toyota dealer for service.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

208

—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips� To cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, push the fan speed se-lector to adjust the fan speed high fora minute to help clear the intake ductsof snow or moisture. This can reducethe amount of fogging on the windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except “OFF”.

On some models


209

� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating


—For automatic operation

Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature— To the desired

temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—OFF

—For manual operation

Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards high temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORAir conditioning—OFF

� For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

� Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

� Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning



Press in the “AUTO” button .Temperature— To the desired

temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—ON


Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards low temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—ON

� For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

210

Ventilation



Press in the “AUTO” button .Temperature— Towards low temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—OFF


Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards low temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF

Defogging and defrosting

—The inside of the windshield



Temperature— Towards high temperatureto heat; low temperatureto cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD


Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards high temperature

to heat; low temperatureto cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defogging function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly.



� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

—The outside of the windshield



Temperature— Towards high temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD


Fan speed— To the desired fan speedTemperature— Towards high temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defrosting function with thepurpose of clearing the front view.

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly.


211



� To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

Side vents

If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe side vents. The side vents may beopened or closed as shown.

Air conditioning filter

Automatic air conditioning systemonly—This air conditioning system hasa high efficient air refiner filter whichhelps eliminate dust and pollen, therebyincreasing your driving confort.

The air conditioning filter is set behind theglove box.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

212

The filter information label is placed onthe inside of the glove box as shown.

CHECKING AND REPLACING AIRCONDITIONING FILTER

The air conditioning filter may clog afterlong use. The filter may need to be re-placed if the air flow of the air conditionerand heater experiences extreme reductionsin operating efficiency, or if the windowsbecome to fog up easily.

Perform filter replacement periodically.

Period of replacement (expected):Every 24000 km (15000 miles) or 12months

Notes: This is the normal maintenance period. This may change depending on operating conditions.

If the symptoms of air conditioningefficiency problems occur, contact yourToyota dealer to have the filter checkedand replaced.

(Actual replacement time: Less than 10minutes approximately)

NOTICE

� Do not try to replace the air condi-tioning filter by yourself. Doing somay damage the vehicle.

� Do not drive with the air filter re-moved. Doing so may reduce airconditioning efficiency.


213

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

214

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSOther equipmentClock 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside temperature gauge 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cigarette lighter and ashtray 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlet 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary box 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coin holder 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front cup holder 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear cup holder 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1- 9


215

Clock (type A)

The digital clock indicates the time.


To reset the hour: Push the “MODE” but-ton until the hour display blinks. Thenpush the “ADJ” button.To reset the minutes: Push the “MODE”button until the minute display blinks.Then push the “ADJ” button.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00 (oneo’clock).

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the time in-dication will be reduced.

Clock (type B)

For details, see “Multi- information dis-play—” in Section 1- 5.

Outside temperature gauge

Type A

Type B

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

216

The outside temperature gauge indi-cates the outside air temperatures withthe ignition key at the “ON” position.

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the displaywill be reduced.

Type A—To change the display between“�C” to “�F”, push the “MODE” button untilthe display blinks. Then push the “ADJ”button to select “�C” or “�F”.

Type B—For details, see “Multi- informationdisplay—” in Section 1- 5.

Cigarette lighter and ashtray

With bucket front seat

With bench type front seat

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

To use the cigarette lighter, first openthe ashtray lid, then press in the light-er. When it becomes heated, it automat-ically pops out ready for use.

If the engine is not running, the key mustbe in the “ACC” position.

Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressedin.

Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter orequivalent for replacement.

ASHTRAY

With bucket front seat—To use the ash-tray, push the lid to open.

With bench type front seat—To use theashtray, pull the lid to open.

When finished with your cigarette, thor-oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-vent other cigarette butts from catchingfire. After using the ashtray, push it backin completely.

To remove the ashtray, open the ashtraylid and pull it out.


217

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, always push the ash-tray back in completely after using.

Power outlet (12 VDC)



The power outlet is designed for powersupply for car accessories.

The key must be in the ”ACC” or ”ON”position for the power outlet to be used.

NOTICE

� To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total vehicle capacity of 12VDC/120W.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlet longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

� Close the power outlet lid when thepower outlet is not in use. Insertinga foreign object other than the ap-propriate plug that fits the outlet,or allowing any liquid into the out-let may cause electrical failure orshort circuits.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

218

Power outlet (115 VAC)



This power outlet is designed for useas a power supply for electric ap-pliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the “ON” position forthe power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt touse an appliance that requires more than115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuitwill activate and cut the power supply.The power supply will restart automaticallywhen you use an appliance that operateswithin the 115 VAC/100W limits.

Main switch

To use the power outlet, push the mainswitch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethat the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turnthe power outlet off. When the power out-let is not in use, make sure that the mainswitch is turned off.


219

NOTICE

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlet longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

� Close the power outlet lid when thepower outlet is not in use. Insertinga foreign object other than the ap-propriate plug that fits the outletmay cause electrical failure or shortcircuits.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following electric appliances eventhough their power consumption is un-der 115 VAC/100W. These appliancesmay not operate properly.

� Appliances with high initial peak watt-age: cathode- ray tube type televisions,compressor- driven refrigerators, electricpumps, electric tools, etc.

� Measuring devices which process pre-cise data: medical equipment, measur-ing instruments, etc.

� Other appliances requiring an extremelystable power supply: microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sen-sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may causeradio noise.

Glove box

To use the glove box, do this.

To open: Pull the lever.

With the instrument panel lights on, theglove box light will come on when theglove box is open.

To lock: Insert the master key and turn itclockwise.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

220

Garage door opener

Garage door openers manufactured un-der the license from HomeLink � andcan be programmed to operate garagedoors, estate gates, security lighting,etc.

PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE DOOROPENER

This garage door opener has 3 buttonsand you can store one program for eachbutton.

1. Decide which one of the 3 buttons youwant to program. Push and hold downone of the buttons until the indicatorlight begins to flash.

2. While holding this button, bring theoriginal garage door opener closer tothe garage door opener equipped onthe vehicle within about 25 mm (1 in.)and push the button on the originalgarage door opener. This signal fromthe original garage door opener is sentto the one to be programmed.

3. When the frequency and code is regis-tered, the indicator light flashes rapidly.Then you can release both buttons.

4. If you wish, repeat the procedure foreach remaining button for another ga-rage door opener.

If you want to write a new program overthe program set already, select a buttonyou want to program and repeat the pro-cedure from step 1. The previous programis erased and a new program will be set.

If the transmitter has a “rolling code” fea-ture, it is necessary to program the ga-rage door opener receiver on the garageafter programming the garage door openeron the vehicle. For the setting of the re-ceiver, refer to the instruction manual forthe receiver.

After setting the receiver, push the pro-grammed button on the vehicle for about1 to 2 seconds within the operationalrange.

The old- type garage door openersmanufactured before 1982 cannot be pro-grammed with this system.

CAUTION

When programming or operating thegarage door opener, make sure thereis no one around the moving door. Itis dangerous if someone is caught.

OPERATING THE GARAGE DOOROPENER

Push the appropriate button to activate thegarage door opener. The indicator lightcomes on. The garage door opener contin-ues to send the signal for up to 20 sec-onds as long as the button is pushed.


221

ERASING THE GARAGE DOOR OPENERMEMORY

Push and hold down the 2 outside buttonsuntil the indicator light flashes. All memo-rized data will be erased.

FCC ID: CB2V94800CANADA: 1763 102 264

This device complies with FCC PulesPart 15. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence that may be received, includinginterference that may cause undersiredoperation.

WARNING: This transmitter has beentested and complies with FCC andDOC/MPAC rules. Changes or modifi-cations not expressly approved by thepartly responsible for compliancecould void the user’s authority to op-erate the device.

Auxiliary box (type A)

To use the box, push the lid to open.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the auxiliary box closedwhile driving.

NOTICE

In hot weather, inside of the vehiclebecomes very hot. Do not leave any-thing flammable or deformable suchas a lighter, the glasses, etc. inside.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

222

Auxiliary box (type B)

To use the box, pull on the handle.

CAUTION


Auxiliary box (type C)

To use the box, pull up the lock releaselever and open the lid.

CAUTION


Auxiliary box (type D)

To use the box, pull up the lock releaselever and open the lid.

CAUTION



223

To maximize the storage room, removethe cup holder by pushing the side fac-ing at its upright position.

Coin holder



To use the coin holder, push coinsdown into the holder.

The coin holder is detachable.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

224

Front cup holder (type A)

The cup holder is designed for holdingcups or drink- cans securely.

To use the cup holder, push on the lid.

CAUTION

� Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink- cans on the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about in the compartmentand possibly injure people in thevehicle during sudden braking or inan accident.

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, keep the cup holderclosed when it is not in use.

Front cup holder (type B)


To use the cup holder, pull up the lockrelease lever and open the lid.


225

CAUTION



� Do not lift the armrest upright whenthe cup holder is pulled out.

Rear cup holder (type A)


To use the cup holder, pull down the arm-rest.

CAUTION




’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

226

Rear cup holder (type B)The cup holder is designed for holdingcups or drink- cans securely in itsholes.

To use the cup holder, open the armrestlid by pulling up the lock release leverand pull out the cup holder. Then closethe armrest lid.

CAUTION

� Do not leave the armrest lid open,especially when the cup holderholds a scalding hot drink. If the lidis forcibly pulled up, the drink mayspill over the seat occupants.

� When the cup holder is in use, thearmrest lid must be securely closedwith the lock engaged.





227

Floor mat

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the floor carpet and floor mat have ahole, then it is designed for use with alocking clip. Fix the floor mat with lockingclip into the hole in the floor carpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor carpet. If the floormat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

228

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR TOYOTABreak- in period 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three- way catalytic converters 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iridium- tipped spark plugs 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage stowage precautions 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2


229

Break- in periodDrive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak- in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:

� Do not drive over 88 km/h (55 mph).

� Run the engine at moderate speed be-tween 2000 and 4000 rpm.

� Avoid full- throttle starts.

� Try to avoid hard stops during the first300 km (200 miles).

� Do not drive for a long time at anysingle speed, either fast or slow.

� Do not tow a trailer during the first 800km (500 miles).

FuelFUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix- ups, yourToyota has a new smaller fuel tank open-ing. The special nozzle on pumps withunleaded fuel will fit it, but the largerstandard nozzle on pumps with leaded gaswill not.

At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5- M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three-way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness and the emission controlsystem to function improperly. Also,this can increase maintenance costs.

OCTANE RATING

Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Oc-tane Number 91) or higher. For im-proved vehicle performance, the use ofpremium unleaded gasoline with an Oc-tane Rating of 91 (Research OctaneNumber 96) or higher is recommended.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octanerating or research octane number lowerthan stated above will cause persistentheavy knocking. If it is severe, this willlead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.

However, now and then, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is no needof concern.

GASOLINES CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVES

Toyota recommends use of gasolinesthat contain detergent additives toavoid buildup of engine deposits.

For further details, ask your Toyota dealeror a local gasoline retailer.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

230

IMPROVED GASOLINES

The American Automobile ManufacturersAssociation (AAMA) has developed aspecification of improved gasolines. TheAAMA specification offers optimal fuelinformation for better vehicle perfor-mance and better protection of your en-gine.

Toyota recommends the use of gasolinesthat meet the AAMA specification, if avail-able, for improved driveability and emis-sion control system.

GASOLINES CONTAINING MTBE

Gasolines that contain MTBE (MethylTertiary- Butyl Ether) are available in themarket. If you use a gasoline mixedwith MTBE, make certain that it doesnot contain more than 15% of MTBE.

GASOLINES CONTAINING MMT

Some gasolines contain an octane- en-hancing additive called MMT (methylcy-clopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasolines that contain MMT. If fuels con-taining MMT are used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.

GASOLINES CONTAINING ALCOHOL

If you use gasohol in your Toyota, besure that it is unleaded, has an octanerating no lower than 87 and does notcontain more than 10% ethanol.

Gasohol is a mixture of gasoline and etha-nol.

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasolines containing methanol. If you usegasoline containing methanol, use onlygasoline meeting the requirements aboveand also containing less than 5% metha-nol with cosolvents and corrosion inhibi-tors for methanol.

GASOLINES QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experiencedriveability problems caused by the partic-ular gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable driveability,try changing gasoline brands. If that doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.

NOTICE

� Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

� If driveab ility problems occur ( poorhot starting, vaporizing, engineknock, etc.), discontinue the use.

� Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 Imp. gal.)


231

Operation in foreign countriesIf you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...

First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octanenumber).

Three- way catalytic converters

The three- way catalytic converter is anemission control device installed in theexhaust system.

Its purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

� Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

� Do not drive, idle or park your ve-hicle over anything that might burneasily such as grass, leaves, paperor rags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three- way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:

� Use only unleaded gasoline.

� Do not drive with an extremely lowfuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three-way catalytic converter.

� Do not allow the engine to run atidle speed for more than 20 min-utes.

� Avoid racing the engine.

� Do not push- start or pull- start yourvehicle.

� Do not turn off the ignition whilethe vehicle is moving.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

232

� Keep your engine in good runningorder. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electronic ignitionsystem/distributor ignition systemor fuel system could cause an ex-tremely high three- way catalyticconverter temperature.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check- up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree- way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

� To ensure that the three- way cata-lytic converter and the entire emis-sion control system operate proper-ly, your vehicle must receive theperiodic inspections required by theToyota Maintenance Schedule. Forscheduled maintenance information,refer to the separate “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’sManual Supplement”.

Engine exhaust cautions

CAUTION

� Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

� Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

� Do not run the engine in a garageor enclosed area except for thetime needed to drive the vehicle inor out. The exhaust gases cannotescape, making this a particularlydangerous situation.

� Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the engine run-ning. If it is unavoidable, however,do so only in an unconfined areaand adjust the heating or coolingsystem to force outside air into thevehicle.

� Keep the trunk lid closed whiledriving. An open or unsealed trunklid may cause exhaust gases to bedrawn into the vehicle.

� To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

� If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, drive with the windowsopen and the trunk lid closed. Havethe cause immediately located andcorrected.


233

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.

� Oil is used to lubricate pistons, pistonrings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when a pis-ton moves downwards in the cylinder.High negative pressure generated whenthe vehicle is decelerating sucks someof this oil into the combustion chamber.This oil as well as some part of the oilfilm left on the cylinder wall is burnedby the high temperature combustiongases during the combustion process.

� Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by highspeed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.

When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note the that oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an expressway, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECK

One of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” in Sec-tion 7- 2.

Facts about engine oilconsumption

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

234

Iridium- tipped spark plugs

Your engine is fitted with iridium- tippedspark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium- tipped spark plugsand do not adjust gaps for your en-gine performance and smooth drive-ability.

Brake system This brake system has two independenthydraulic circuits. If either circuit shouldfail, the other will still work. However, thepedal will be harder to press, and yourstopping distance will be longer. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only asingle brake system. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses engine vacuum topower- assist the brakes. If the engineshould quit while you are driving, you canbring the vehicle to a stop with normalpedal pressure. There is enough reservedvacuum for one or two stops—but nomore!

CAUTION

� Do not pump the brake pedal if theengine stalls. Each push on thepedal uses up your reserved vacu-um.

� Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willbe longer.


235

ANTI- LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

The anti- lock brake system is designed tohelp prevent lock- up of the wheels duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces. This assists in providingstability and steering performance of thevehicle under these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal:When the anti- lock brake system func-tion is in action, just hold the brakepedal down more firmly. Especially, in apanic stop, you need to keep it de-pressed more firmly, and do not pumpthe brake. Pumping the brake pedalmakes the stopping distance longer.

The anti- lock brake system becomes op-erative after the vehicle has acceleratedto a speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad surfaces such as on the manholecover, the steel plate under the construc-tion, joints in the bridge, etc. on a rainyday tends to activate the anti- lock brakesystem.

You may hear a click or motor sound inthe engine compartment for a few secondswhen the engine is started or just afterthe vehicle is started. This means that theanti- lock brake system is in the selfcheck mode, and does not indicate a mal-function.

When the anti- lock brake system is ac-tivated, the following conditions mayoccur, however, do not indicate a mal-function of the system:

� You may hear the anti- lock brake sys-tem operating and feel the brake pedalpulsating and the vibrations of the ve-hicle body and steering wheel. Youmay also hear the motor sound in theengine compartment even after the ve-hicle is stopped.

� At the end of the anti- lock brake sys-tem activation, the brake pedal maymove a little to the forward.

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti- lockbrake system: Although the anti- lockbrake system assists in providing ve-hicle control, it is still important todrive with all due care and maintaina moderate speed and safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you, be-cause there are limits to the vehiclestability and effectiveness of steeringwheel operation even with the anti-lock brake system on .

If tires grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti- lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

236

Anti- lock brake system is not de-signed to shorten the stopping dis-tance: Always drive at the moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you.Compared with vehicles not fittedwith an anti- lock brake system, yourvehicle may require a longer stoppingdistance in the following cases:

� Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.

� Driving with tire chains installed.

� Driving over the steps such as thejoints on the road

� Driving on roads where the roadsurface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size atappropriate pressure: The anti- lockbrake system detects vehicle speedsusing the speed sensors for respec-tive wheels’ turning speeds. The useof tires other than specified may failto detect the accurate turning speed,resulting in a longer stopping dis-tance.

Type A

Type B

“ABS” warning light

The lights come on with the ignitionkey turned to “ON”. If the anti- lockbrake system and the brake assiste sys-tem work properly, the light goes outafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if eitherof the system malfunctions, the lightscome on.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti- lock brake system, the brake assistsystem, the traction control system and/orthe vehicle skid control system do/doesnot operate, but the brake system stilloperates conventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti- lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden brake or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

If the following conditions occurs, thisindicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warninglight system. Contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible to servicethe vehicle.

� The light does not come on with theignition key turned to “ON” or remaindson.


237


If the light lit during driving goes out anddoes not come on again, it is a normaloperation.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, the vehicle may becomeharder to control or skid during hardbraking or braking on slippery roadsurfaces.

DRUM- IN- DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKESYSTEM

Your vehicle has a drum- in- disc typeparking brake system. This type of brakesystem needs bedding- down of the brakeshoes periodically or whenever the parkingbrake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-ding- down.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

When you slam the brakes on, thebrake assist system judges as an emer-gency stop and provides more powerfulbraking for a driver who cannot holddown the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-erful braking will be applied. At this time,you may hear a sound in the enginecompartment and feel the vibration of thebrake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-function.

The brake assist system becomes opera-tive after the vehicle has accelerated toa speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system’s warn-ing light, see “Service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers” in Section 1- 5.

Brake pad wear limit indicators

The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

238

Luggage stowage pr ecautionsWhen stowing luggage or cargo in thevehicle, observe the following:

� Put luggage or cargo in the trunk whenat all possible. Be sure all items aresecured in place.

� Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as far for-ward as possible helps maintain bal-ance.

� For better fuel economy, do not carryunneeded weight.

CAUTION

� Do not place anything on the fillerpanel behind the rear seatback.Such items may be thrown aboutand possibly injure people in thevehicle during sudden braking or anaccident.

� Do not drive with objects left ontop of the instrument panel. Theymay interfere with the driver’s fieldof view. Or they may move duringsharp vehicle acceleration or turn-ing, and impair the driver’s controlof the vehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occupants.

NOTICE

Do not load the vehicle beyond thevehicle capacity weight specified inSection 8.

The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

Your Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identificationnumber


239

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Label.

—Engine number

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown.

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 56mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

Theft prevention labels (except for Canada)

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

240

Suspension and chassis

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous handling charac-teristics, resulting in loss of control.

Types of tiresMake sure what kind of tires your ve-hicle is originally equipped with.

1. Summer tires

Summer tires are highspeed capabilitytires best suited to highway driving underdry conditions.

Since summer tires do not have the sametraction performance as snow tires, sum-mer tires are inadequate for driving onsnow- covered or icy roads. For driving onsnow- covered or icy roads, we recom-mend using snow tires. If installing snowtires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2. All season tires

All season tires are designed to providebetter traction in snow and to be adequatefor driving in most winter conditions, aswell as for use all year round.

All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performance comparedwith snow tires in heavy or loose snow.Also, all season tires fall short in accel-eration and handling performancecompared with summer tires in highwaydriving.

CAUTION

� Do not mix summer and all seasontires on your vehicle as this cancause dangerous handling charac-teristics, resulting in loss of con-trol.

� Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s designated tires, andnever mix tires or wheels of thesizes different from the originals.


241

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

242

STARTING AND DRIVINGBefore starting the engine 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer, too 251. . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3


243

Before starting the engine1. Check the area around the vehicle be-

fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,seat cushion angle, head restraintheight and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all the doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If youneed to restart the engine while thevehicle is moving, put the selector le-ver in “N”. A starter safety device willprevent the starter from operating if theselector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it tothe floor until driving off.

(b) Starting the engineBefore starting the engine, be sure to fol-low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system in yourengine automatically controls the properair- fuel mixture for starting. You can starta cold or hot engine as follows:

1. With your foot off the accelerator ped-al, crank the engine by turning the keyto “START”. Release it when the en-gine starts.

2. After the engine runs for about 10 se-conds, you are ready to drive.

If the weather is below freezing, let theengine warm up for a few minutes beforedriving.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” in Sec-tion 4.

How to start the engine—(a) Before cranking

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

244

NOTICE

� Do not crank for more than 30 se-conds at a time. This may overheatthe starter and wiring systems.

� Do not race a cold engine.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, have theengine checked immediately.

� Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

� Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp- edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage result-ing in tire bursts.

� When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and place the transmis-sion in “P”. If necessary, block thewheels.

� Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

� Before driving off, make sure theparking brake is fully released andthe parking brake reminder light isoff.

� Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the engine is running.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

� To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andnot work properly.

� Be careful when accelerating, up-shifting, downshifting or braking ona slippery surface. Sudden accelera-tion or engine braking, could causethe vehicle to spin or skid.

Tips for driving in variousconditions


245

� Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas highspeed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury. Be sure to con-sult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare highspeed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

� Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require alonger stopping distance, and itmay pull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Also, the park-ing brake will not hold the vehiclesecurely.

Winter driving tipsMake sure you have a proper freezeprotection of engine coolant.

Your coolant must contain ethylene- glycoltype coolant for a proper corrosionprotection of aluminum components. Use“TOYOTA Long Life Coolant” or equivalent.

See Section 7- 2 for details about coolanttype selection.

NOTICE

Do not use alcohol type antifreeze orplain water alone.

When it is extremely cold, we recommendto use 60% solution for your Toyota, toprovide protection down to about -50�C(- 58�F). Do not use more than 70% solu-tion for better coolant performance.

Check the condition of the battery andcables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity ofany battery, so it must be in top shapeto provide enough power for winter start-ing. Section 7- 3 tells you how to visuallyinspect the battery. Your Toyota dealerand most service stations will be pleasedto check the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.

See Section 7- 2 for recommended viscos-ity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in yourvehicle during winter months may causeharder starting. If you are not sure aboutwhich oil to use, call your Toyota deal-er—he will be pleased to help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de- icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

246

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into“P” and block the rear wheels. Do not usethe parking brake, or snow or water accu-mulated in and around the parking brakemechanism may freeze, making it hard torelease.

Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During badwinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

Trailer towingYour vehicle is designed primarily as apassenger- carrying vehicle. Towing atrailer will have an adverse effect onhandling, performance, braking, durabilityand driving economy (fuel consumption,etc.). Your safety and satisfaction dependon the proper use of correct equipmentand cautious driving habits. For yoursafety and the safety of others, you mustnot overload your vehicle or trailer. Toyotawarranties do not apply to damage ormalfunction caused by towing a trailer forcommercial purposes. Ask your localToyota dealer for further details beforetowing.

NOTICE

When towing a trailer, be sure to con-sult your Toyota dealer for further in-formation on additional requirementssuch as a towing kit, etc.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-er weight, gross vehicle weight, grossaxle weight and trailer tongue load areall within the limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue loadcan be measured with platform scalesfound at a highway weighing station, build-ing supply company, trucking company,junk yard, etc.

CAUTION

� The total trailer weight (trailerweight plus its cargo load) mustnot exceed 907 kg (2000 lb.). Ex-ceeding this weight is dangerous.


247

� Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-ent weight capacities established bythe hitch manufacturer. Even thoughthe vehicle may be physically capa-ble of towing a higher weight, theoperator must determine the maxi-mum weight rating of the particularhitch assembly and never exceedthe maximum weight rating speci-fied for the trailer- hitch. Exceedingthe maximum weight rating set bythe trailer hitch manufacturer cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

� The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) indicated on theCertification Label. The gross ve-hicle weight is the sum of weightsof the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch and trailertongue load. It also includes theweight of any special equipmentinstalled on your vehicle.

� The load on either the front or rearaxle resulting from distribution ofthe gross vehicle weight on bothaxles must not exceed the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) listedon the Certification Label.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

248

Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load� 100 = 9 to 11%

Total trailer weight

� The trailer cargo load should bedistributed so that the tongue loadis 9 to 11% of the total trailerweight, not exceeding the maximumof 90 kg (200 lb.). Never load thetrailer with more weight in the backthan in the front. About 60% of thetrailer load should be in the fronthalf of the trailer and the remaining40% in the rear.

HITCHES

� Use only a hitch which is recom-mended by the hitch manufacturer andconforms to the total trailer weight re-quirement.

� Follow the directions supplied by thehitch manufacturer, and bolt the hitchsecurely to the rear bumper. Lubricatethe hitch ball with a light coat ofgrease.

� Toyota recommends removing the trail-er hitch whenever you are not towinga trailer to reduce the possibility ofadditional damage caused by the hitchif your vehicle is struck from behind.After removing the hitch, seal anymounting holes in the vehicle body toprevent entry of pollutants such as ex-haust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

NOTICE

Do not use axle- mounted hitches asthey can cause damage to the axlehousing, wheel bearings, wheels ortires. Also, never install a hitch whichmay interfere with the normal functionof an Energy Absorbing Bumper.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

� Toyota recommends trailers with brakesthat conform to any applicable federaland state/provincial regulations.

� A safety chain must always be usedbetween the towing vehicle and thetrailer. Leave sufficient slack in thechain for turns. The chain should crossunder the trailer tongue to prevent thetongue from dropping to the ground incase it becomes damaged or sepa-rated. For correct safety chain proce-dures, follow the hitch or trailermanufacturer’s recommendations.

CAUTION

� If the total trailer weight exceeds453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes arerequired.

� Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-draulic system as it would lower itsbraking effectiveness.


249

� Never tow a trailer without using asafety chain securely attached toboth the trailer and the vehicle. Ifdamage occurs to the coupling unitor hitch ball, there is danger of thetrailer wandering over into anotherlane.

TIRES

� Ensure that your vehicle’s tires areproperly inflated. See Section 7- 2 forinstructions.

� The trailer tires should be inflated tothe pressure recommended by the trail-er manufacturer in respect to the totaltrailer weight.

TRAILER LIGHTS

� Trailer lights must comply with federal,state/provincial and local regulations.See your local recreational vehicledealer or rental agency for the correcttype of wiring and relays for your trail-er. Check for correct operation of theturn signals and stop lights each timeyou hitch up. Direct splicing may dam-age your vehicle’s electrical systemand cause a malfunction of your lights.

BREAK- IN SCHEDULE

� Toyota recommends that you do nottow a trailer with a new vehicle or avehicle with any new power train com-ponent (engine, transmission, differen-tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

� If you tow a trailer, your vehicle willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. For this informa-tion, please refer to the scheduledmaintenance information in the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’sManual Supplement”.

� Retighten all fixing bolts of the towingball and bracket after approximately1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

PRE- TOWING SAFETY CHECK

� Check that your vehicle remains levelwhen a loaded or unloaded trailer ishitched. Do not drive if the vehicle hasan abnormal nose- up or nose- downcondition, and check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes.

� Make sure the trailer cargo is securelyloaded so that it can not shift.

� Check that your rear view mirrors con-form to any applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If not,install the rear view mirrors requiredfor towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle willhandle differently than when not tow-ing. The three main causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, exces-sive speed and improper trailer loading.Keep these in mind when towing:

� Before starting out, check operation ofthe lights and all vehicle- trailer connec-tions. After driving a short distance,stop and recheck the lights and con-nections. Before actually towing a trail-er, practice turning, stopping and back-ing with a trailer in an area away fromtraffic until you learn the feel.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

250

� Backing with a trailer is difficult andrequires practice. Grip the bottom ofthe steering wheel and move your handto the left to move the trailer to theleft. Move your hand to the right tomove the trailer to the right. (This pro-cedure is generally opposite to thatwhen backing without a trailer). Also,just turn the steering wheel a little ata time, avoiding sharp or prolongedturning. Have someone guide you whenbacking to reduce the risk of an acci-dent.

� Because stopping distance may be in-creased, vehicle- to- vehicle distanceshould be increased when towing atrailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) ofspeed, allow at least one vehicle andtrailer length between you and the ve-hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking asyou may skid, resulting in jackknifingand loss of control. This is especiallytrue on wet or slippery surfaces.

� Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-tion.

� Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.The trailer could hit your vehicle in atight turn. Slow down before making aturn to avoid the necessity of suddenbraking.

� Remember that when making a turn,the trailer wheels will be closer thanthe vehicle wheels to the inside of theturn. Therefore, compensate for this bymaking a larger than normal turningradius with your vehicle.

� Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect handling of your vehicleand trailer, causing sway. Pay attentionto the rear from time to time to pre-pare yourself for being passed by largetrucks or buses, which may cause yourvehicle and trailer to sway. If swayinghappens, firmly grip the steering wheeland reduce speed immediately butgradually. Never increase speed. Steerstraight ahead. If you make no extremecorrection with the steering or brakes,the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

� Be careful when passing other ve-hicles. Passing requires considerabledistance. After passing a vehicle, donot forget the length of your trailer andbe sure you have plenty of room be-fore changing lanes.

� In order to maintain engine braking effi-ciency do not use overdrive.

� Because of the added load of the trail-er, your vehicle’s engine may overheaton hot days (at temperatures over30�C [85�F]) when going up a long orsteep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, immediately turn off the airconditioning (if in use), pull off the roadand stop in a safe spot. Refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” in 4 of thismanual.

� Always place wheel blocks under boththe vehicle and trailer wheels whenparking. Apply the parking brake firmly.Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-ing on a slope with a trailer, but if itcannot be avoided, do so only afterperforming the following:


251

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release your brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.

When restarting out after parking on aslope:

1. With the transmission in “P” position,start the engine. Be sure to keep thebrake pedal depressed.

2. Shift into the “2”, “L” or “R” position.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal and slowly pull or back awayfrom the wheel blocks. Stop and applyyour brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) orthe posted towing speed limit,whichever is lower. Because insta-bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle-trailer combination usually in-creases as the speed increases, ex-ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) maycause loss of control.

� Slow down and downshift beforedescending steep or long downhillgrades. Do not make sudden down-shifts.

� Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. Thiscould cause the brakes to overheatand result in reduced braking effi-ciency.

Getting more kilometers/mileage from aliter/gallon of fuel is easy—just take iteasy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:

� Keep your tires inflated at the cor-rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See 7- 2 forinstructions.

� Do not carry unneeded weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the engine, causinggreater fuel consumption.

� Avoid lengthy warm- up idling. Oncethe engine is running smoothly, begindriving—but gently. Remember, howev-er, that on cold winter days this maytake a little longer.

� Keep the automatic transmissionoverdrive turned on when enginebraking is not required. Driving withthe overdrive off will reduce the fueleconomy. (For details, see “Automatictransmission” in Section 1- 6.)

� Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts.

How to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer, too

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

252

� Avoid long engine idling. If you havea long wait and you are not in traffic,it is better to turn off the engine andstart again later.

� Avoid engine lug or overrevving. Usea gear position suitable for the road onwhich you are travelling.

� Avoid continuous speeding up andslowing down. Stop- and- go drivingwastes fuel.

� Avoid unnecessary stopping andbraking. Maintain a steady pace. Tryto time the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

� Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal. This causes premature wear,overheating and poor fuel economy.

� Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive, the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

� Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting the curb andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

� Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

� Keep your vehicle tuned- up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oiland grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.all lower engine performance and con-tribute to poor fuel economy. For longerlife of all s and lower operating costs,keep all maintenance work on sched-ule, and if you often drive under se-vere conditions, see that your vehiclereceives more frequent maintenance(For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the separate“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”).

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coastdown hills. Your power steering andbrake booster will not function with-out the engine running. Also, theemission control system operatesproperly only when the engine is run-ning.


253

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

254

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

SECTION 4


255

If your vehicle will not start 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

256

If your engine stalls while driving 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


257

If your vehicle overheats 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

258

If you have a flat tire 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


259

If your vehicle needs to be towed 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

260

If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 276. . . . . . . .


261

If you lose your keys 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

262

If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 278. . . . . . . . . . . . .


263

Before making these checks, make sureyou have followed the correct startingprocedure given in “How to start theengine” in Section 3 and that you havesufficient fuel. If your vehicle is equippedwith the engine immobiliser system, alsocheck whether the other keys will start theengine. If they work, your key may bebroken. Have the key checked at yourToyota dealer. If none of your keys work,the system is possibly broken. Call yourToyota dealer. (See “Keys (with engineimmobiliser system)” in Section 1- 2.)

If the engine is not turning over or is turn-ing over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals aretight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switchon the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes outwhen the starter is cranked, the batteryis discharged. You may try jump start-ing. See “(c) Jump starting” for furtherinstructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still willnot start, it needs adjustment or repair.Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repairshop.

NOTICE

Do not pull- or push- start the ve-hicle. It may damage the vehicle orcause a collision when the enginestarts. Also the three- way catalyticconverter may overheat and become afire hazard.

If the engine turns over at its normalspeed but will not start—

1. The engine may be flooded because ofrepeated cranking. See “(b) Starting aflooded engine” for further instructions.

2. If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyotadealer or qualified repair shop.

(b) Starting a flooded engineIf the engine will not start, your enginemay be f looded because of repeatedcranking.

If this happens, turn the key to “START”with the accelerator pedal held down.Keep the key and accelerator pedal inthese positions for 15 seconds and re-lease them. Then try starting the enginewith your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the engine does not start after 15 se-conds of cranking, release the key, waita few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealeror qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE

Do not crank for more than 30 se-conds at a time. This may overheatthe starter and wiring systems.

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

264

(c) Jump startingTo avoid serious personal injury anddamage to your vehicle which might re-sult from battery explosion, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, these instructions must befollowed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent me-chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

� Batteries contain sulfuric acidwhich is poisonous and corrosive.Wear protective safety glasses whenjump starting, and avoid spillingacid on your skin, clothing, or ve-hicle.

� If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water im-mediately. Then get immediate medi-cal attention. If possible, continueto apply water with a sponge orcloth while en route to the medicaloffice.

� The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unless youare sure that the booster battery iscorrect.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, make sure the vehiclesare not touching. Turn off all unneces-sary lights and accessories.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster and discharged batter-ies. Lay a cloth over the open ventson the batteries. (This helps reduce theexplosion hazard, personal injuries andburns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting, run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.


265

Discharged battery

Boosterbattery

Positiveterminal(“+”mark)

Jumper cable Positive terminal(“+”mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the or-der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal on the boosterbattery.

Jumper cable

Negative terminal(“- ”mark)

Discharged battery Boosterbattery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) jumper cable to the negative(- ) terminal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) jumper cable toa solid, stationary, unpainted, metallicpoint of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

The recommended connecting point isshown in the following illustration:

Connecting point

Do not connect the cable to or nearany part that moves when the engineis cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

266

5. Start your engine in the normal way.After starting, run it at about 2000 rpmfor several minutes with the acceleratorpedal lightly depressed.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

8. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent (for example, lights left on),you should have it checked.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Try starting the engine again.

If the engine will not start, see “If yourvehicle will not start”.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

If your vehicle overheatsIf your engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates overheating, if you ex-perience a loss of power, or if you heara loud knocking or pinging noise, theengine has probably overheated. Youshould follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Put the transmission in “P”and apply the parking brake. Turn offthe air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the engine.Wait until the steam subsides beforeopening the hood. If there is no coolantboiling over or steam, leave the enginerunning and make sure the electriccooling fan is operating. If it is not,turn the ignition off.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

If your engine stalls whiledriving


267

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keephands and clothing away from themoving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the en-gine immediately. Call a Toyota dealerfor assistance.

5. If there are no obvious leaks, checkthe coolant reservoir. If it is dry, addcoolant to the reservoir while the en-gine is running. Fill it about half full.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the engine and radiator arehot. Serious injury could result fromscalding hot fluid and steam blownout under pressure.

6. After the engine coolant temperaturehas cooled to normal, again check thecoolant level in the reservoir. If neces-sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-ous coolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

If you have a flat tire—1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place well away fromthe traffic. Avoid stopping on the centerdivider of a highway. Park on a levelspot with firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on youremergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake and putthe transmission in “P”.

4. Have everyone get out of the vehicleon the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructions thor-oughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe thefollowing to reduce the possibility ofpersonal injury:

� Follow jacking instructions.

� Do not put any part of your bodyunder the vehicle supported by thejack. Personal injury may occur.

� Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by thejack.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

268

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parking brakeand put the transmission in “P”.Block the wheel diagonally oppositeto the one being changed if neces-sary.

� Make sure to set the jack properlyin the jack point. Raising the ve-hicle with jack improperly posi-tioned will damage the vehicle ormay allow the vehicle to fall off thejack and cause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by the jackalone.

� Use the jack only for lifting yourvehicle during wheel changing.

� Do not raise the vehicle with some-one in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, do notput an object on or under the jack.

� Raise the vehicle only high enoughto remove and change the tire.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with a de-flated tire. Driving even a short dis-tance can damage a tire and wheelbeyond repair.

—Required tools and spare tire

1. Get the required tools and sparetire.

1. Wheel nut wrench2. Jack3. Jack handle4. Spare tire

To prepare yourself for an emergency, youshould familiarize yourself with the use ofthe jack, each of the tools and their stor-age locations.


269

Turn the jack joint by hand.

To remove: Turn the joint in the direction1 until the jack is free.

To store: Turn the joint in the direction 2until the jack is firmly secured to preventit from flying forward during a collision orsudden braking.

To remove the spare tire:

1. Loosen the nut and remove it.

2. Remove the spare tire cover.

3. Loosen the bolt and remove it.

4. Remove the spacer.

Then take the spare tire out of the ve-hicle.

When storing the spare tire, put it in placewith the outer side of the wheel facing up.Then secure the tire by repeating theabove removal steps in reverse order toprevent it from flying forward during acollision or sudden braking.

—Blocking the wheel

2. Block the wheel diagonally oppositethe flat tire to keep the vehicle fromrolling when it is j acked up.

When blocking the wheel, place a wheelblock from the front for the front wheelsor from the rear for the rear wheels.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

270

3. Remove the wheel ornament.

Pry off the wheel ornament, using thebeveled end of the wheel nut wrench asshown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the ornament byhand. Take due care in handling theornament to avoid unexpected person-al injury.

—Loosening wheel nuts

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.

Always loosen the wheel nuts before rais-ing the vehicle.

Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise toloosen. To get maximum leverage, fit thewrench to the nut so that the handle ison the right side, as shown above. Grabthe wrench near the end of the handleand pull up on the handle. Be careful thatthe wrench does not slip off the nut.

Do not remove the nuts yet—just unscrewthem about one- half turn.

—Positioning the jack

5. Position the jack at the correct jackpoint as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned on alevel and solid place.

—Removing wheel ornament (steel wheels only)


271

—Raising your vehicle

6. After making sure that no one is inthe vehicle, raise it high enough sothat the spare tire can be installed.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the spare tirethan when removing the flat tire.

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handleinto the jack (it is a loose fit) and turn itclockwise. As the jack touches the vehicleand begins to lift, double- check that it isproperly positioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when thevehicle is supported by the jackalone.

—Changing wheels

7. Remove the wheel nuts and changetires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.

Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with the bolts.Then lift up the wheel and get at least thetop bolt started through its hole. Wigglethe tire and press it back over the otherbolts.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

272

Before putting on wheels, remove any cor-rosion on the mounting surfaces with awire brush or such. Installation of wheelswithout good metal- to- metal contact at themounting surface can cause wheel nuts toloosen and eventually cause a wheel tocome off while driving. Therefore after thefirst 1600 km (1000 miles), check to seethat the wheel nuts are tight.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fingertight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end in-ward) and tighten them as much as youcan by hand. Press back on the tire backand see if you can tighten them more.

—Lowering your vehicle

9. Lower the vehicle completely andtighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle counterclockwise tolower the vehicle.

Use only the wheel nut wrench and turnit clockwise to tighten the nuts. Do notuse other tools or any additional leverageother than your hands, such as a hammer,pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrenchis securely engaged over the nut.

Tighten each nut a little at a time in theorder shown. Repeat the process until allthe nuts are tight.


273

CAUTION

When lowering the vehicle, make sureall portions of your body and all oth-er persons around will not be injuredas the vehicle is lowered to theground.

10. Reinstall the wheel ornament.

Align the cutout of the wheel ornamentwith the valve stem as shown. Then tapit firmly with the side or heel of your handto snap it into place.

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the orna-ment to avoid unexpected personalinjury.

—After changing wheels11. Check the air pressure of the re-

placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specificationdesignated in Section 8. If the pressure islower, drive slowly to the nearest servicestation and fill to the correct pressure.

Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflationvalve cap as dirt and moisture could getinto the valve core and possibly cause airleakage. If the cap is missing, have a newone put on as soon as possible.

12. Restow all the tools, jack and flattire securely.

As soon after changing wheels as pos-sible, tighten the wheel nuts to the torquespecified in Section 8 with a torquewrench. Have a technician repair the flattire and replace the spare tire with it.

—Reinstalling wheel ornament(steel wheels only)

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

274

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools, jack and flat tire are securelyin place in their storage location toreduce the possibility of personal in-jury during a collision or s uddenbraking.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

—From front

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice. In consultation with them, haveyour vehicle towed using either (a) or(b).

Only when you cannot receive a towingservice from a Toyota dealer or com-mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-hicle carefully in accordance with theinstructions given in “—Emergency tow-ing” in this section.

Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following pre-cautions are observed. If necessary, showthis page to the tow truck driver.

If your vehicle needs to betowed—


275

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front— Release the parking brake.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to en-sure adequate ground clearance fortowing at the opposite end of theraised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumperand/or underbody of the towed vehiclewill be damaged during towing.

From rear— Use a towing dolly under thefront wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow from the rear with the frontwheels on the ground, as this maycause serious damage to the trans-mission.

(b) Using flat bed truck

(c) Towing with sling type truck

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.

—Emergency towing

Front

Rear (on some models)

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

276

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice.

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tempo-rarily towed by a cable or chain se-cured to one of the emergency towingeyelets under the vehicle. Use extremecaution when towing vehicles.

NOTICE

Only use specified towing eyelet;otherwise your vehicle may be dam-aged.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steerit and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard- surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, drive train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve-hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erraticdriving maneuvers which would placeexcessive stress on the emergencytowing eyelets and towing cable orchain. The eyelets and towing cableor chain may break and cause seriousinjury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specificallyintended for use in towing vehicles.Securely fasten the cable or chain tothe towing eyelets provided.

Before towing, release the parking brakeand put the transmission in “N”. The keymust be in “ACC” (engine off) or “ON”(engine running).

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

If you cannot shift the selector leverout of “P” position to other positionseven though the brake pedal is de-pressed, use the shift lock override but-ton as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”position. Make sure the parkingbrake is set.

2. Pry up the cover with a flat- bladedscrewdriver or equivalent.

If you cannot shift automatictransmission selector lever(floor shift)


277

3. Insert your finger into the hole topush down the shift lock overridebutton. You can shift out of “P”position only while pushing the but-ton.

4. Shift into “N” position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If you cannot shift the selector leverout of “P” position to other positionseven though the brake pedal is de-pressed, use the shift lock override but-ton as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”position. Make sure the parkingbrake is set.

2. Pry up the cover with a flat- bladedscrewdriver or equivalent.

3. Insert the screwdriver or equivalentinto the hole to pull down the shiftlock override button. You can shiftout of “P” position only while push-ing the button.

4. Shift into “N” position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If you cannot shift automatictransmission selector lever(column shift)

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

278

If you lose your keysYou can purchase a new key at yourToyota dealer if you can give them thekey number. If your vehicle is equippedwith the engine immobiliser system, thedealer will also need your master key.

Vehicles with engine immobiliser system—Even if you lose only one key, contactyour Toyota dealer to make a new key. Ifyou lose all your master keys, you cannotmake new keys; the whole engine immobi-liser system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” inSection 1- 2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

You can purchase a new wireless re-mote control transmitter at your Toyotadealer.

Have the registered identification numbersof your transmitters deleted from your ve-hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to avoid the possibility of theft oran accident. Then, have the identificationnumber of your new transmitter registered.At the same time, you must bring all ofthe remaining transmitters to have themregistered again as well.

You can use the wireless remote controlsystem with the new transmitter. Contactyour Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If you lose your wirelessremote control transmitter


279

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

280

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CAREProtecting your Toyota from corrosion 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5


281

Toyota, through its diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, has done its part tohelp prevent corrosion and has providedyou with the finest quality vehicleconstruction. Now, it is up to you. Propercare of your Toyota can help ensure long-term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:

� The accumulation of road salt, dirt andmoisture in hard- to- reach areas underthe vehicle.

� Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:

� Road salt or dust control chemicals willaccelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea-coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

� High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

� Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

� High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which are prevented fromquick- drying due to lack of proper ven-tilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:

� If you drive on salted roads in thewinter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

� High pressure water or steam is effec-tive for cleaning the vehicle’s undersideand wheel housings. Pay particularattention to these areas as it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to simply wet themud and debris without removing them.The lower edge of doors, rocker panelsand frame members have drain holeswhich should not be allowed to clogwith dirt as trapped water in theseareas can cause corrosion.

� Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” formore tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota fromcorrosion

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

282

Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If youdrive on salted or gravel roads, mudshields help protect your vehicle. Full- sizeshields, which come as near to the groundas possible, are the best. We recommendthat the fittings and the area where theshields are installed be treated to resistcorrosion. Your Toyota dealer will behappy to assist in supplying and installingthe shields if they are recommended foryour area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it in coveredwith water or snow, your garage may beso damp it will cause corrosion. Even ifyour garage is heated, a wet vehicle cancorrode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.

The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

� When driving in a coastal area

� When driving on a road sprinkled withantifreeze

� When having stuck of coal tar, treesap, bird droppings and carcass of aninsect

� When driving in the areas where thereis a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dustand chemical substance

� When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand- washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not hot to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chassis,be careful not to injure your hands.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or in thewheel wells.

2. Wash with a mild carwash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard–letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stances splashes an ornament, be sure towash it off with water and check if theornament is damaged.

CAUTION

Do not attach the heavily damagedplastic wheel ornament. It may fly offthe wheel and cause accidents whilethe vehicle is moving.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Washing and waxing yourToyota


283

Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gaso-line, kerosene, benzine or strong sol-vents), which may be toxic or causedamage.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap cancause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some type ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.

Once a month or if the vehicle surfacedoes not repel water well, apply wax.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car- cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.

3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers ifyour vehicle is re- painted and placedin a high heat paint waxing booth.High temperatures could damage thebumpers.

Cleaning the interior

CAUTION

� Vehicles with side airbags:Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, resulting in seriousinjury.

� Do not wash the vehicle floor withwater, or allow water to get ontothe floor when cleaning the vehicleinterior or exterior. Water may getinto audio components or otherelectrical components above or un-der the floor carpet (or mat) andcause a malfunction; and it maycause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

284

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-peat the procedure. Commercial foaming-type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam- type shampoo toclean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol cans and others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

� Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts—it may weaken them.

� Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the win-dows, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires on the rearwindow.

Air conditioning control panel, car au-dio, instrument panel, console panel,and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

� If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

� If you use a liquid car freshener, donot spill the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentionedabove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.


285

Leather Interior

The leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.

NOTICE

� If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

� Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, o ralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as thesecould c ause discoloring.

� Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

� Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

� Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.

� The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm.

� Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

286

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CAREMaintenance requirements 287. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the separate“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 6


287

Maintenance requirementsYour Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day- to- day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, and trouble- free, safe, and eco-nomical drivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle and emis-sion control system warranties specify thatproper maintenance and care must be per-formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day-to- day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to insure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.

These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the separate “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacementparts used for maintenance or for therepair of the emission control systembe Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non- Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-nance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systemperformed by any automotive repair es-tablishment or individual without invali-dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’sManual Supplement” for complete war-ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well- trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in- dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. And if anyproblems should arise with your vehiclewhile under warranty, your Toyota dealerwill promptly take care of it. Again, besure to keep a copy of the repair orderfor any service performed on your Toyota.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

288

What about do- it- yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented in Section 7.

If you are a skilled do- it- yourself mechan-ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-mended. Please be aware that do- it- your-self maintenance can affect your warrantycoverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for the details.

General maintenanceListed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only where ade-quate ventilation can be obtained ifyou run the engine.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Tire pressureCheck the pressure with a gauge everytwo weeks, or at least once a month. SeeSection 7- 2 for additional information.

Tire surface and wheel nutsCheck the tires carefully for cuts, damageor excessive wear. See Section 7- 2 foradditional information. When checking thetires, make sure no nuts are missing, andcheck the nuts for looseness. Tightenthem if necessary.

Tire rotationRotate the tires every 12000 km (7500miles). See Section 7- 2 for additional in-formation.

Fluid leaksCheck underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-ter or other fluid after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. If you smell fuelfumes or notice any leak, have the causefound and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hoodCheck that all doors including trunk lidoperate smoothly and all latches lock se-curely. Make sure the engine hood sec-ondary latch secures the hood from open-ing when the primary latch is released.


289

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

LightsMake sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzersCheck that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheelCheck that it has the specified free play.Be alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

SeatsCheck that all front seat controls such asseat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. op-erate smoothly and that all latches locksecurely in any position. Check that thehead restraints move up and downsmoothly and that the locks hold securelyin any latched position.

Seat beltsCheck that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure the beltwebbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-aged.

Accelerator pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedalCheck the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.

BrakesAt a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brakeCheck that the pedal has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-nismCheck the lock release button of the se-lector lever for proper and smooth opera-tion. On a safe incline, check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selectorlever in “P” position and all brakes re-leased.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.

Washer fluidMake sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See Section 7- 3 for additional infor-mation.

Engine coolant levelMake sure the coolant level is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see-through reservoir when the engine is cold.See Section 7- 2 for additional information.

Battery electrolyte levelMake sure the electrolyte level of all bat-tery cells is between upper and lower lev-el lines on the case. Add only distilledwater when replenishing. See Section 7- 3for additional information.

Brake fluid levelMake sure the brake fluid level is correct.See Section 7- 2 for additional information.

Engine oil levelCheck the level on the dipstick with theengine turned off and the vehicle parkedon a level spot. See Section 7- 2 for addi-tional information.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

290

Power steering fluid levelCheck the level through the reservoir. Thelevel should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”range depending on the fluid temperature.See Section 7- 2 for additional information.

Exhaust systemIf you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. (See engine exhaust cautions inSection 2.)

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip- offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:

� Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

� Appreciable loss of power

� Strange engine noises

� A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-ter dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

� Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

� Flat- looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

� Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

� Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

� Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake; pedal almost touchesfloor; vehicle pulls to one side whenbraking

� Engine coolant temperature continuallyhigher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

Does your vehicle needrepairing?


291

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

292

DO- IT- YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroduction

SECTION 7- 1


293

Engine compartment overview 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

294

Fuse locations 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


295

Do- it- yourself service precautions 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

296

Parts and tools 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


297

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine oil level dipstick

4. Engine oil filler cap

5. Brake fluid reservoir

6. Fuse blocks

7. Battery

8. Electric cooling fans

9. Windshield washer fluid tank

Engine compartment overview

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

298

Fuse locations

Spare fuses

With daytime running light system


299

If you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this section.

You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.

Performing do- it- yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.

This section gives instructions only forthose items that are relatively easy for anowner to perform. As explained in Section6, there are still a number of items thatmust be done by a qualified technicianwith special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do-it- yourself maintenance, see “Parts andtools”.

Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

CAUTION

� When the engine is running, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan and enginedrive belts. (Removing rings,watches, and ties is advisable.)

� Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

� If the engine is hot, do not removethe radiator cap or loosen the drainplugs to prevent burning yourself.

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames around fuel or thebattery. Their fumes are flammable.

� Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the battery. It contains poi-sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

� Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

� Be sure that the ignition is off ifyou work near the electric coolingfans or radiator grille. With theignition on, the electric cooling fanswill automatically start to run if theengine coolant temperature is highand/or the air conditioning is on.

� Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to flyingor falling material, fluid spray, etc.

� Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

Do- it- yourself serviceprecautions

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

300

� Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

� Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealer ora service station for informationconcerning recycling or disposal.

NOTICE

� Remember that battery and ignitioncables carry high currents or volt-ages. Be careful of accidentallycausing a short circuit.

� Add only demineralized or distilledwater to fill the radiator. And if youspill some of the coolant, be sureto wash off with water to prevent itfrom damaging the parts or paint.

� Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the spark plug holes.

� Do not pry the outer electrode of aspark plug against the center elec-trode.

� Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

� Do not reuse iridium- tipped sparkplugs by cleaning or regapping.

� Do not overfill automatic transmis-sion fluid, or the transmissioncould be damaged.

� Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

� Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

� When closing the engine hood,check to see that you have not for-gotten any tools, rags, etc.


301

Parts and toolsHere is a list of parts and tools you willneed on performing do- it- yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.

Checking the engine oil level

Parts (if level is low):� Engine oil API grade SJ

“Energy- Conserving” or ILSACmultigrade having viscosity proper foryour climate

Tools:� Rag or paper towel� Funnel (only for adding oil)

Checking the engine coolant level

Parts (if level is low):� “TOYOTA Long Life Coolant” or equiva-

lentSee Section 7- 2 for details about cool-ant type selection.

� Demineralized or distilled water

Tools:� Funnel (only for adding coolant)

Checking brake fluid

Parts (if level is low):� SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

brake fluid

Tools:� Rag or paper towel� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

Checking power steering fluid

Parts (if level is low):� Automatic transmission fluid

DEXRON�II or III

Tools:� Rag or paper towel� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

Checking battery condition

Tools:� Warm water� Baking soda� Grease� Conventional wrench (for terminal

clamp bolts)

Checking and replacing fuses

Parts (if replacement is necessary):� Fuse with same amperage rating as

original

Adding washer fluid

Parts:� Water� Washer fluid containing antifreeze

(for winter use)

Tools:� Funnel

Replacing light bulbs

Parts:� Bulb with same number and wattage

rating as original (See charts in “Re-placing light bulbs” in Section 7- 3.)

Tools:� Screwdriver

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

302

DO- IT- YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and Chassis

SECTION 7- 2


303

Checking the engine oil level 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

304

Checking the engine coolant level 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


305

Checking brake fluid 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

306

Checking power steering fluid 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


307

Checking tire pressure 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

308

Checking and replacing tires 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


309

Rotating tires 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

310

Installing snow tires and chains 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


311

Replacing wheels 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

312

Aluminum wheel precautions 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


313

Checking the engine oil level

Low level

Add oil O.K. Too full

Full level

With the engine at operating tempera-ture and turned off, check the oil levelon the dipstick.

1. To get a true reading, the vehicleshould be on a level spot. After turningoff the engine, wait a few minutes forthe oil to drain back into the bottom ofthe engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, and wipe it cleanwith a rag.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as faras it will go, or the reading will not becorrect.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel on the end.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-haust manifold.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick.

The approximate quantity of oil needed tofill between the low level and the full levelon the dipstick is indicated below for ref-erence.

When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand- tight.

Oil quantity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

NOTICE

� Avoid overfilling, or the enginecould be damaged.

� Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

Engine oil selection

Use API grade SJ, “Energy- Conserving”or ILSAC multigrade engine oil.

Recommended viscosity (SAE):

SAE 5W- 30 is the best choice for yourvehicle, for good fuel economy andgood starting in cold weather.

If you use SAE 10W- 30 engine oil inextremely low temperatures, the enginemay become difficult to start, so SAE5W- 30 engine oil is recommended.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

314

API service symbol

ILSAC certification mark

Oil identification marks

Either or both API registered marks areadded to some oil containers to helpyou select the oil you should use.

The API Service Symbol is located any-where on the outside of the container.

The top portion of the label shows the oilquality by API (American Petroleum Insti-tute) designations such as SJ. The centerportion of the label shows the SAE viscos-ity grade such as SAE 5W- 30. “Energy-Conserving” shown in the lower portion,indicates that the oil has fuel- saving ca-pabilities.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is displayed on the front ofthe container.

Look at the see- through coolant reser-voir when the engine is cold. The cool-ant level is satisfactory if it is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on thereservoir. If the level is low, add ethyl-ene- glycol type coolant for a propercorrosion protection of aluminum com-ponents.

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith engine temperature. However, if thelevel is on or below the “LOW” line, addcoolant. Bring the level up to the “FULL”line.

Always use ethylene- glycol type coolantfor a proper corrosion protection of alumi-num components. See information in thenext column.

If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, radiator cap and draincock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

Checking the engine coolantlevel


315

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notremove the radiator cap when the en-gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damageyour engine cooling system. Your coolantmust contain ethylene- glycol type coolantfor a proper corrosion protection of yourengine that contains aluminumcomponents. Use “TOYOTA Long LifeCoolant” or equivalent.

In addition to preventing freezing andsubsequent damage to the engine, thistype of coolant will also prevent corrosion.Further supplemental inhibitors or additivesare neither needed nor recommended.

Read the coolant container for informationon freeze protection. Follow the manufac-turer’s directions for how much to mixwith plain water (preferably demineralizedwater or distilled water). The total capacityof the cooling system is given in Section8.

We recommend to use 50% solution foryour Toyota, to provide protection down toabout -35�C (- 31�F). When it is extreme-ly cold, to provide protection down toabout -50�C (- 58�F), 60% solution is rec-ommended. Do not use more than 70%solution for better coolant performance.

NOTICE


Checking brake fluid

To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see- through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear. Sobe sure to keep the reservoir filled.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, itmay indicate a serious mechanical prob-lem.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

316

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 orFMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to thebrake reservoir.

Remove and replace the reservoir cap byhand. Fill the brake fluid to the dottedline. This brings the fluid to the correctlevel when you put the cap back on.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Onceopened, brake fluid absorbs moisture fromthe air, and excess moisture can cause adangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the r eservoirbecause brake fluid can harm youreyes and damage painted surfaces. Iffluid gets in your eyes, flush youreyes with clean water.

NOTICE

If you spill the fluid, be sure to washit off with water to prevent it fromdamaging the parts or paint.

Checking power steering fluid

If hotO.K. Close Open

If coldO.K.

If coldadd

If hotadd

Check the fluid level through the reser-voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-mission fluid DEXRON �II or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a littlemore in frigid temperatures), the fluid ishot (60�C—80�C or 140�F—175�F). Youmay also check the level when the fluidis cold (about room temperature,10�C—30�C or 50�F—85�F) if the enginehas not been run for about five hours.

Clean all dirt from outside of the reservoirtank and look at the fluid level. If the fluidis cold, the level should be in the “COLD”range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid levelshould be in the “HOT” range. If the levelis at the low side of either range, addautomatic transmission fluid DEXRON�II orIII to bring the level within the range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-voir cap, visually check the steering boxcase, vane pump and hose connectionsfor leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so becareful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-ing could be damaged.


317

Checking tire pressure

Keep your tire pressures at the properlevel.

The recommended cold tire pressures, tiresize and the vehicle capacity weight aregiven in Section 8. They are also on thetire pressure label as shown.

You should check the tire pressures everytwo weeks, or at least once a month. Anddo not forget the spare!

Incorrect tire pressure can reduce tirelife and make your vehicle less safe todrive.

Low tire pressure results in excessivewear, poor handling, reduced fuel econo-my, and the possibility of blowouts fromoverheated tires. Also, low tire pressurecan cause poor sealing of the tire bead.If the tire pressure is excessively low,there is the possibility of wheel deforma-tion and/or tire separation.

High tire pressure produces a harsh ride,handling problems, excessive wear at thecenter of the tire tread, and a greaterpossibility of tire damage from road haz-ards.

If a tire frequently needs refilling, have itchecked by your Toyota dealer.

The following instructions for checkingtire pressure should be observed:

� The pressure should be checked onlywhen the tires are cold. If your ve-hicle has been parked for at least 3hours and has not been driven formore than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, youwill get an accurate cold tire pressurereading.

� Always use a tire pressure gauge.The appearance of a tire can be mis-leading. Besides, tire pressures thatare even just a few pounds off candegrade ride and handling.

� Do not bleed or reduce tire pressureafter driving. It is normal for the tirepressure to be higher after driving.

� Never exceed the vehicle capacityweight. The passenger and luggageweight should be located so that thevehicle is balanced.

� Be sure to reinstall the tire inflationvalve caps. Without the valve caps,dirt or moisture could get into the valvecore and cause air leakage. If the capshave been lost, have new ones put onas soon as possible.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

318

Checking and replacing tires

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES

Check the tire tread for the tread wearindicators. If the indicators show, re-place the tires.

The tires on your Toyota have built- intread wear indicators to help you knowwhen the tires need replacement. Whenthe tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06in.) or less, the indicators will appear. Ifyou can see the indicators in two or moreadjacent grooves, the tire should be re-placed. The lower the tread, the higherthe risk of skidding.

The effectiveness of snow tires is lostif the tread wears down below 4 mm(0.16 in.).

Check the tires regularly for damagesuch as cuts, splits and cracks. If anydamage is found, consult with a techni-cian and have the tire repaired or re-placed.

Even if the damage does not appear seri-ous, a qualified technician should examinethe damage. Objects which have pene-trated the tire may have caused internaldamage.

Any tires which are over 6 years oldmust be checked by a qualified techni-cian even if damage is not obvious.

Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.

This also applies to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRES

When replacing a tire, use only thesame size and construction as original-ly installed and with the same or great-er load capacity.

Using any other size or type of tire mayseriously affect handling, ride, speedome-ter/odometer calibration, ground clearance,and clearance between the body and tiresor snow chains.

CAUTION

� Do not mix radial, bias belted, orbias- ply tires on your vehicle. Itcan cause dangerous handling char-acteristics, resulting in loss of con-trol.

� Do not use tires or wheels otherthan the manufacturer’s recom-mended size.

Toyota recommends all four tires, or atleast both front or rear tires be re-placed as a set.

See “If you have a flat tire” in Section 4for tire change procedure.

When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.

An unbalanced wheel may affect vehiclehandling and tire life. Wheels can get outof balance with regular use and shouldtherefore be balanced occasionally.

When replacing a tubeless tire, the airvalve should also be replaced with anew one.


319

Rotating tires

With a spare tire of the same wheel typeas the installed tires

With a spare tire of different wheel typefrom the installed tires

To equalize tire wear and help extendtire life, Toyota recommends that yourotate your tires approximately every12000 km (7500 miles). However, themost appropriate timing for tire rotationmay vary according to your driving hab-its and road surface conditions.

See “If you have a flat tire” in Section 4for tire change procedure.

When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear is usu-ally caused by incorrect tire pressure, im-proper wheel alignment, outof- balancewheels, or severe braking.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select the samesize, construction and load capacity asthe original tires on your Toyota.

Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on allwheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires which could cause loss ofvehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you shouldstore them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sureto install them in the same direction whenreplacing.

Installing snow tires andchains

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

320

CAUTION

� Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

� Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)with any type of snow tires.

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

P205/65R15 92H tires—Use the tirechains of correct size and type.

Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chainsexcept radial cable chains or V- bar typechains.

P205/60R16 91H tires—Use tire chainsof the correct size.

Use only genuine Toyota tire chains or equiv-alent for use on the AVALON.

NOTICE

If the wrong combination of tire andchain is used, the chains could dam-age the vehicle body.

� AVALON genuine tire chains (Part No. 08329- 33801)

Laws about using tire chains vary ac-cording to locality and type of road, soalways check your local laws beforeyou install tire chains.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the front tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the rear tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5—1.0 km(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

� Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

� Avoid sharp turns or locked- wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

Replacing wheelsWHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace damaged wheels, thetire may slip off the wheel or cause lossof handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.


321

Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

Aluminum wheel precautions� After driving your vehicle the first 1600

km (1000 miles), check that the wheelnuts are tight.

� If you have rotated, repaired, orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

� When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

� Use only the Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

� When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

� As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

322

DO- IT- YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking battery condition 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7- 3


323

CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable andexplosive hydrogen gas.

� Do not cause a spark from the bat-tery with tools.

� Do not smoke or light a match nearthe battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

� Avoid contact with eyes, skin orclothes.

� Never ingest electrolyte.

� Wear protective safety glasses whenworking near the battery.

� Keep children away from the bat-tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

� If electrolyte gets in your eyes,flush your eyes with clean waterimmediately and get immediatemedical attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with a spongeor cloth while en route to the medi-cal office.

� If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burning, get medi-cal attention immediately.

� If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

� If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.

—Checking battery exterior

TerminalsGround cable

Hold- downclamp

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold- down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it offwith a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten their clamp nuts—but do notovertighten.

c. Tighten the holddown clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

Checking battery c ondition——Precautions

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

324

NOTICE

� Be sure the engine and all accesso-ries are off before performing main-tenance.

� When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“- ” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

� Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

� Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

—Checking battery fluid

Type A

Green DarkClear or light yellow

Type B

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY HYDROMETER

Check the battery condition by thehydrometer color.

Hydrometer colorCondition

Type A Type BCondition

GREEN BLUE Good

DARK WHITE

Charging necessary.Have battery checked by your Toyota dealer.

CLEAR orLIGHTYELLOW

REDHave battery checked by your Toyota dealer.

Battery recharging precautionsDuring recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installedon the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-charger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

� Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

� Only do a slow charge (5 A orless). Charging at a quicker rate isdangerous. The battery may ex-plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while theengine is running. Also, be sure allaccessories are turned off.


325

Checking and replacing fuses

Type A

Good Blown

Type B

Good

Good

Blown

Blown

Type C

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” in Section 7- 1 forlocations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperativecomponent off. Pull a suspected fusestraight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. SeeSection 8 of this manual for the functionscontrolled by each circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by thepull- out tool. The location of the pull- outtool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “RADIO”,“HTR” or “A/C” fuse, which may bedispensable for normal driving, and use itif its amperage rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeas possible to the rating. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

326

If the new fuse immediately blows out,there is a problem with the electrical sys-tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.

Adding washer fluidIf any washer does not work or lowwindshield washer fluid level warninglight comes on, the washer tank may beempty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Replacing light bulbs—The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the ignition switch andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter if scratchedor dropped. Hold a bulb only by itsplastic or metal case. Do not touchthe glass part of a bulb with barehands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.


327

Light bulbs BulbNo.

W Type

Headlights(low beam)

9006 51 A

Headlights(high beam)

9005 60 B

Front fog lights 9006 51 A

Front turn signal/parking lights

1157NA

27/8 C

Rear turn signal lights

7440 21 D

Stop/tail lights 7443 21/5 D

Rear side marker lights

168 4.9 D

Back- up lights 921 18 D

License plate lights W5W 5 D

High mounted stoplight

921 18 D

Interior light — 7 E

Front personal lights

— 7 E

Rear personal lights

— 5 E

Vanity lights — 2 E

Light bulbs BulbNo. W Type

Glove box light — 1.2 D

Door courtesy lights

— 6 E

Trunk light — 3 E

A: HB4 halogen bulbsB: HB3 halogen bulbsC: Single end bulbsD: Wedge base bulbsE: Double end bulbs

—Headlights

1. Unplug the connector while depress-ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

328

2. Turn the bulb and remove it. 3. Install a new bulb and the connectorinto the mounting hole.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

If either the left or right front fog orfront turn signal/parking lights burnsout, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the front fog orfront turn signal/parking light bulbsby yourself. You may damage the ve-hicle.

—Front fog and front turn signal/parking lights


329

Use a flat- bladed screw driver. a: Stop/tail lightb: Rear turn signal lightc: Rear side marker light

—Back- up lights

Remove and install the cover clips asshown in the following illustrations.

—Rear turn signal, stop/tail and rear side marker lights

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

330

Removing cover clips

Installing cover clips

—License plate lights

Remove and install the cover clips asshown in the following illustrations.


331

Removing cover clips

Installing cover clips

—High mounted stoplight(type A)

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

332

—High mounted stoplight(type B)


333

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

334

SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 8


335

Dimensions and weight 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

336

Engine 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


337

Fuel 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

338

Service specifications 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


339

Tires 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

340

Fuses 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


341

Dimensions and weight EngineModel:

1MZ- FE

Type:6 cylinder V type 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):87.5 � 83.0 (3.44 � 3.27)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):2995 (182.8)

Overall length mm (in.) 4875 (192.0)

Overall width mm (in.) 1820 (71.7)

Overall height mm (in.) 1465 (57.7)∗1

Wheelbase mm (in.) 2720 (107.0)

Front tread mm (in.) 1550 (61.0)

Rear tread mm (in.) 1525 (60.0)

∗1: Unladen vehicle∗2: With floor shift type automatic transmission∗3: With column shift type automatic transmission

Vehicle capacity weight(occupants � luggage) kg (lb.)

410 (904)∗2

475 (1047)∗3

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

342

FuelFuel type:

Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.For improved vehicle performance, theuse of premium unleaded gasoline withan Octane Rating of 91 (Research Oc-tane Number 96) or higher is recom-mended.

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):70 (18.5, 15.4)

Service specificationsENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)

Spark plug type:DENSO SK20R11NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):1.1 (0.043)

Drive belt tension measured with Bor-roughs drive belt tension gauge No.BT- 33- 73F (used belt), Ibf:

Generator belt88�22

Power steering pump belt115�20

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.qt.):

With filter 4.7 (5.0, 4.1)Without filter 4.5 (4.8, 4.0)

Oil grade:API grade SJ, “Energy- Conserving” orILSAC multigrade engine oil is recom-mended.

Recommended oil viscosity (SAE):


343

COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):9.0 (9.5, 7.9)

Coolant type: “TOYOTA Long Life Coolant” or equiva-lent

With ethylene- glycol type coolant for aproper corrosion protection of aluminumcomponents


BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20�C (68�F):12.6—12.8 V Fully charged12.2—12.4 V Half charged11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutesafter the key is removed with all thelights turned off

Charging rates:5 A max.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Fluid capacity (drain and refill),L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Up to 4.75 (5.0, 4.2)

Fluid type:Automatic transmission fluid D- II orDEXRON�III (DEXRON�II)

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the pressure of 490 N (50 kgf, 110lbf) with the engine running, mm (in.)

75 (3.0)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, in. (mm):1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, in. (mm):1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when depressedwith the pressure of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1lbf):

3—6 clicks

Fluid type:SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play:Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type:Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON�IIor III

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

344

TiresTire size and pressure:

kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Tire sizeTire pressure

Wheel sizeTire sizeFront Rear

Wheel size

P205/65R15 92H 210 (2.1, 31) 210 (2.1, 31) 15 � 6JJ

P205/60R16 91H 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 16 � 6JJ

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·Ibf):103 (10.5, 76)

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire pressure” through “Aluminumwheel precautions” in Section 7- 2.


345

Fuses

Engine compartment (without daytime running light system)

Engine compartment (with daytime running light system)

Engine compartment (with daytime running light system)

Fuses (type A)

1. HEAD RH 15 A: Right- hand headlight,high beam indicator light

2. HEAD LH 15 A: Left- hand headlight,front fog lights

3. ABS NO.4 5 A: Vehicle skid controlsystem

4. SPARE 30 A: Spare fuse




8. ALT- S 5 A: Charging system

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

346

Instrument panel

9. DCC 30 A: “DOME”, “ECU- B” and“RADIO” fuses

10. SRS WRN 5 A: SRS warning light

11. HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights

12. A/F 25 A: Air/Fuel sensor

13. DOOR NO.2 15 A: Power door locksystem

14. HORN 10 A: Horn, theft- deterrent sys-tem

15. AM2 10 A: SRS airbag system, multi-port fuel injection system/sequentialmultiport fuel injection system, startersystem, charging system, air/fuel sen-sor, fuel pump

16. EFI NO.2 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, air flow meter, oxygensensor, evaporative emission controlsystem, throttle positioner control sys-tem, engine control system

17. ABS NO.3 25 A: Anti- lock brake sys-tem

18. ABS NO.2 25 A: Vehicle skid controlsystem

19. EFI NO.1 15 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, fuel pump

20. IG2 15 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

21. HEAD RH UPR 10 A: No circuit

22. HEAD LH UPR 15 A: No circuit

23. HEAD RH LWR 15 A: Right- handheadlight (low beam)

24. HEAD LH LWR 15 A: Left- hand head-light (low beam)

25. DRL 7.5 A: Daytime running light sys-tem

26. HEAD LH UPR 10 A: Left- hand head-light (high beam), high beam indicatorlight

27. HEAD RH UPR 10 A: Right- handheadlight (high beam)

28. ECU- IG NO.1 5 A: Electric coolingfans

29. ECU- B 7.5 A: Air conditioning system,theft deterrent system, power seats,meters, power windows (for driver andfront passenger), multiplex communica-tion system

30. TAIL 10 A: Parking lights, license platelights, tail lights, rear side markerlights, rear light failure warning light,engine control system

31. SEAT HTR 20 A: Seat heaters

32. FR P/W 20 A: Power window (for frontpassenger)

33. GAUGE NO.1 10 A: Vehicle skid con-trol system, rear window defogger,cruise control system, shift lock sys-tem, anti- lock brake system, auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror, automaticlight control system, power seats, rearlight failure warning light, automatictransmission indicator lights, power out-let, power window (for driver), brakesystem warning light, electric moonroof

34. HTR 10 A: Air conditioning system

35. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights


347

36. TURN 7.5 A: Turn signal lights

37. A/C 10 A: Air conditioning system

38. RADIO 15 A: Audio system, multi- in-formation display

39. PANEL 5 A: Gauges and meters, audiosystem, cigarette lighter, air condition-ing system, emergency flasher, elec-tronically controlled automatic transmis-sion system, power rear view mirrors,multi- information display, glove boxlight, instrument panel lights, instrumentpanel light control, power outlet

40. FL P/W 25 A: Power window (for driv-er)

41. PWR OUTLET NO.1 15 A: Power out-let (ACC)

42. ECU- ACC 5 A: Audio system, powerrear view mirrors, multi- information dis-play, shift lock system, multiplex com-munication system

43. SRS- ACC 10 A: SRS airbag system

44. MIR HTR 10 A: Outside rear view mir-ror defoggers, engine control system

45. PWR OUTLET NO.2 15 A: Power out-let (IG)

46. GAUGE NO.2 10 A: Back- up lights

47. OBD- II 7.5 A: On- board diagnosis sys-tem

48. STOP 15 A: Stop lights, high mountedstoplight, anti- lock brake system, shiftlock system, cruise control system, ve-hicle skid control system, engine con-trol system

49. DOME 7.5 A: Interior light, front per-sonal lights, door courtesy lights, igni-tion switch light, vanity lights, garagedoor opener, open door warning light,illuminated entry system, rear personallights, automatic light control system,trunk light, wireless remote control sys-tem, multiplex communication system

50. OPNER 5 A: No circuit

51. RL P/W 20 A: Power window (for rearleft passenger)

52. RR P/W 20 A: Power window (for rearright passenger)

53. WIP 25 A: Windshield wipers andwasher

54. ECU- IG NO.2 10 A: Anti- lock brakesystem, cruise control system, multi- in-formation display, theft deterrent sys-tem, vehicle skid control system, me-ters, multiplex communication system

55. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter

56. DOOR NO.1 25 A: Theft deterrent sys-tem, trunk opener, multiplex commu-nication system

57. SUN ROOF 30 A: Electric moon roof

Fuses (type B)

58. AM1 40 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem

59. HTR 50 A: Air conditioning system

60. CDS 30 A: Electric cooling fans

61. RDI 30 A: Electric cooling fans

62. MAIN 40 A: Starter system

63. DEF 40 A: Rear window defogger,noise filter

64. PWR SEAT 30 A: Power seats

Fuses (type C)

65. ABS 60 A: Anti- lock brake system,“ABS NO.4” fuse

66. ALT 120 A: “HTR”, “A/C”, “ABS NO.2”,“ABS NO.3”, “RDI”, “CDS”, “AM1”,“ABS” and “ABS NO.4” fuses


349

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS AND UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADINGReporting safety defects for U.S. owners 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uniform tire quality grading 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

350

If you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately in-form the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll- free: 1- 800- 331- 4331).

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of ve-hicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may ei-ther call the Auto Safety Hotlinetoll- free at 1- 800- 424- 9393 (or366- 0123 in Washington, D.C.area) or write to: NHTSA. U.S.Department of Transportation.Washington, D.C. 20590. You canalso obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety from the Hot-line.

Uniform tire quality gradingThis information has been prepared in ac-cordance with regulations issued by theNational Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-tration of the U.S. Department of Trans-portation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyotavehicles with information on uniform tirequality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer anyquestions you may have as you read thisinformation.

DOT quality grades—All passenger cartires must conform to Federal SafetyRequirements in addition to thesegrades. These quality grades aremolded on the sidewall.

Treadwear— The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wear rateof the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government testcourse. For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and a half (1- 1/2) timesas well on the government course as atire graded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and may de-part significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road characteris-tics and climate.

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners


351

Traction AA, A, B, C— The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C, and they represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on spe-cified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may havepoor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not includecornering (turning) traction.

Temperature A, B, C— The temperaturegrades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire to de-generate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a lev-el of performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of perfor-mance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades for thistire are established for a tire that is prop-erly inflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or in combina-tion, can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

’00 AVALON U (L/O 9908)

352

’99 avalon (usa/canada)- u - amazon s3 · ’00 avalon u (l/o 9908) 2 1. side vents 2. side...

Documents